Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell...

68
User Manual Encoder/Counter Modules (Cat. Nos. 1771ĆIJ and 1771ĆIK) AllenĆBradley

Transcript of Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell...

Page 1: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

13

DeviceNet DeviceNetManager and RediSTATION are trademarks of Allen-Bradley Company IncPLC PLCndash2 PLCndash3 and PLCndash5 are registered trademarks of Allen-Bradley Company IncWindows is a trademark of MicrosoftMicrosoft is a registered trademark of MicrosoftIBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Incorporated

All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies

1313

13

Read this preface to familiarize yourself with this manual and tolearn how to use it properly and efficiently

We assume that you have previously used an Allen-Bradleyprogrammable controller that you are familiar with its features andthat you are familiar with the terminology we use If not read theuser manual for your processor before reading this manual

In this manual we refer to

bull the individual encoder counter module as the ldquomodulerdquobull the programmable controller as the ldquocontrollerrdquo or the

ldquoprocessorrdquo

The contents of this manual are as follows

13

$ amp ( ( )

+

- + )

( 0 ((+ ( )((

1 0 ((+ 1 )((

13 ) (( ) )( 2 $ 333

1313

) )

We use these conventions in this manual

) )

)

$

amp

Using This ManualPndash2

1313

Because of the variety of uses for the products described in thispublication those responsible for the application and use of theseproducts must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have beentaken to assure that each application and use meets all performanceand safety requirements including any applicable laws regulationscodes and standards In no event will Rockwell Automation beresponsible or liable for indirect or consequential damage resultingfrom the use or application of these products

Any illustrations charts sample programs and layout examplesshown in this publication are intended solely for purposes ofexample Since there are many variables and requirements associatedwith any particular installation Rockwell Automation does notassume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual propertyliability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in thispublication

AllenndashBradley publication SGIndash11 Safety Guidelines forApplication Installation and Maintenance of SolidndashState Control(available from your local Rockwell Automation office) describessome important differences between solidndashstate equipment andelectromechanical devices that should be taken into considerationwhen applying products such as those described in this publicationReproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication inwhole or part without written permission of Rockwell Automationis prohibited

Throughout this publication notes may be used to make you awareof safety considerations The following annotations and theiraccompanying statements help you to identify a potential hazardavoid a potential hazard and recognize the consequences of apotential hazard

WARNING

Identifies information about practices orcircumstances that can cause an explosion in ahazardous environment which may lead topersonal injury or death property damage oreconomic loss

ATTENTION

Identifies information about practices orcircumstances that may lead to personal injury ordeath property damage or economic loss

IMPORTANTIdentifies information that is critical forsuccessful application and understanding of theproduct

13

Using This Manual Pndash3

1313

This preface gave you information on how to use this manualefficiently

amp

Using This ManualPndash4

1313

1313

13 (

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 )

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1 0 -( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$-5 5 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13138 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

8$( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 +

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 0 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 6( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

)2( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) ( ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Table of Contents

amp $

-

Table of Contents

1313

13 0

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 1 0 ( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 1

2( $ 333 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) =7(gt134 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2

13

13

1313

This publication describes installation adjustments and theprogramming necessary for communication between theEncoderCounter Module (cat no 1771-IJ-IK) and a programmablecontroller processor The programming techniques given here enablethe processor to direct the operation of the encodercounter moduleand to monitor its status

The encodercounter module can be used with any Allen-Bradleyprocessor that uses the 1771 IO structure

Depending on the intended use of the encodercounter module twodifferent programming methods can be used These methods are

bull Single transfer programmingUse single transfer only if the module is in a local IO chassis andgenerally when not using preset words (If using preset wordswith single transfer you must use multiplexing as described insection titled Multiplexing in Chapter 5) If using single transferdisregard chapter 6 on block transfer

bull Block transfer programmingUse block transfer any time If using block transfer disregardchapter 5 on single transfer

The encodercounter module maintains a count independent of theprocessor of input pulses that typically originate from such devicesas quadrature type encoders high speed optical beam counters andcertain types of switches The module (Figure 11) is capable ofmaking decisions based on the count total by comparing it topreviously programmed values and activating either one or both ofits outputs based on the results of the comparison The module canalso return the accumulated count to the processor for arithmeticcomputations or display

The module also provides inputs for a marker signal from an encoderand a voltage level signal from a limit switch to allow for homepositioning In the count mode the direction of the count can bechanged either from the processor or for speed critical application atthe module itself through an external switch The maximumdetectable input pulse frequency of the module is 50kHz

3

3 413

1ndash2 Introduction

1313

56(7(

8 97 7 (11(-lt=

-9 9$

lt 9)

lt

7 ( +

3

The module will count in either BCD or binary numbers In theBCD mode the range is 000 to 999 with carry and borrow bitsprovided to cascade counters in the program The binary modeallows a higher count total with a range of 0000 to 409510 but thenumber appears at the processor in binary Additionally the modulecan improve the accuracy of certain quadrature type of encoders byadding the count at both channel A and channel B (times 2 mode) orby counting the rising and falling of both channel inputs to give afourfold increase in the count (times 4 mode)

The encodercounter module is available in two versions

bull cat no 1771-IJ - uses a 5V dc external power supply that allowsinputs to be TTL compatible Outputs can either be driven fromthe 5V dc supply through the module or from a separate loadsupply of a different voltage

bull cat no 1771-IK - uses a 12-24V dc external power supply Inputdevices should be compatible with the voltage of the externalpower supply Outputs can be driven either from the externalsupply through the module or from a separate load supply

1ndash3Introduction

1313

The encodercounter module is shipped with two 12 terminalgold-plated Field Wiring Arms (cat no 1771-WB)

Unless otherwise noted this manual refers to both versions of themodule

There are seven status indicators (Figure 12) on the front of the lefthalf of the module The four indicators corresponding to channel Achannel B marker and switch inputs illuminate when theirrespective input signals are high The next two indicators show thestate of the outputs An output indicator is on when the outputcircuit is activated The bottom indicator illuminates when themodule detects a fault

56(7)

gt 84

1

lt

9)

9)

7

3

When system power is turned on the module runs a self-test Duringpower-up it is normal for the fault indicator to flash on momentarilyIf the FAULT LED does not turn off the module has detected a faultThe self-test includes checks to make sure that all counters andregisters have been reset to zero and memory is cleared If abreakdown of communication occurs during block transfer theFAULT LED will also light Bit 14 the diagnostic bit in the inputstatus word is also set anytime the FAULT LED is on

After power-up the module will stay in its reset state (outputsdisabled and counter held reset) until the necessary control bits areset in the program

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 2: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

DeviceNet DeviceNetManager and RediSTATION are trademarks of Allen-Bradley Company IncPLC PLCndash2 PLCndash3 and PLCndash5 are registered trademarks of Allen-Bradley Company IncWindows is a trademark of MicrosoftMicrosoft is a registered trademark of MicrosoftIBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Incorporated

All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies

1313

13

Read this preface to familiarize yourself with this manual and tolearn how to use it properly and efficiently

We assume that you have previously used an Allen-Bradleyprogrammable controller that you are familiar with its features andthat you are familiar with the terminology we use If not read theuser manual for your processor before reading this manual

In this manual we refer to

bull the individual encoder counter module as the ldquomodulerdquobull the programmable controller as the ldquocontrollerrdquo or the

ldquoprocessorrdquo

The contents of this manual are as follows

13

$ amp ( ( )

+

- + )

( 0 ((+ ( )((

1 0 ((+ 1 )((

13 ) (( ) )( 2 $ 333

1313

) )

We use these conventions in this manual

) )

)

$

amp

Using This ManualPndash2

1313

Because of the variety of uses for the products described in thispublication those responsible for the application and use of theseproducts must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have beentaken to assure that each application and use meets all performanceand safety requirements including any applicable laws regulationscodes and standards In no event will Rockwell Automation beresponsible or liable for indirect or consequential damage resultingfrom the use or application of these products

Any illustrations charts sample programs and layout examplesshown in this publication are intended solely for purposes ofexample Since there are many variables and requirements associatedwith any particular installation Rockwell Automation does notassume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual propertyliability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in thispublication

AllenndashBradley publication SGIndash11 Safety Guidelines forApplication Installation and Maintenance of SolidndashState Control(available from your local Rockwell Automation office) describessome important differences between solidndashstate equipment andelectromechanical devices that should be taken into considerationwhen applying products such as those described in this publicationReproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication inwhole or part without written permission of Rockwell Automationis prohibited

Throughout this publication notes may be used to make you awareof safety considerations The following annotations and theiraccompanying statements help you to identify a potential hazardavoid a potential hazard and recognize the consequences of apotential hazard

WARNING

Identifies information about practices orcircumstances that can cause an explosion in ahazardous environment which may lead topersonal injury or death property damage oreconomic loss

ATTENTION

Identifies information about practices orcircumstances that may lead to personal injury ordeath property damage or economic loss

IMPORTANTIdentifies information that is critical forsuccessful application and understanding of theproduct

13

Using This Manual Pndash3

1313

This preface gave you information on how to use this manualefficiently

amp

Using This ManualPndash4

1313

1313

13 (

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 )

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1 0 -( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$-5 5 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13138 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

8$( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 +

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 0 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 6( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

)2( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) ( ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Table of Contents

amp $

-

Table of Contents

1313

13 0

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 1 0 ( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 1

2( $ 333 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) =7(gt134 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2

13

13

1313

This publication describes installation adjustments and theprogramming necessary for communication between theEncoderCounter Module (cat no 1771-IJ-IK) and a programmablecontroller processor The programming techniques given here enablethe processor to direct the operation of the encodercounter moduleand to monitor its status

The encodercounter module can be used with any Allen-Bradleyprocessor that uses the 1771 IO structure

Depending on the intended use of the encodercounter module twodifferent programming methods can be used These methods are

bull Single transfer programmingUse single transfer only if the module is in a local IO chassis andgenerally when not using preset words (If using preset wordswith single transfer you must use multiplexing as described insection titled Multiplexing in Chapter 5) If using single transferdisregard chapter 6 on block transfer

bull Block transfer programmingUse block transfer any time If using block transfer disregardchapter 5 on single transfer

The encodercounter module maintains a count independent of theprocessor of input pulses that typically originate from such devicesas quadrature type encoders high speed optical beam counters andcertain types of switches The module (Figure 11) is capable ofmaking decisions based on the count total by comparing it topreviously programmed values and activating either one or both ofits outputs based on the results of the comparison The module canalso return the accumulated count to the processor for arithmeticcomputations or display

The module also provides inputs for a marker signal from an encoderand a voltage level signal from a limit switch to allow for homepositioning In the count mode the direction of the count can bechanged either from the processor or for speed critical application atthe module itself through an external switch The maximumdetectable input pulse frequency of the module is 50kHz

3

3 413

1ndash2 Introduction

1313

56(7(

8 97 7 (11(-lt=

-9 9$

lt 9)

lt

7 ( +

3

The module will count in either BCD or binary numbers In theBCD mode the range is 000 to 999 with carry and borrow bitsprovided to cascade counters in the program The binary modeallows a higher count total with a range of 0000 to 409510 but thenumber appears at the processor in binary Additionally the modulecan improve the accuracy of certain quadrature type of encoders byadding the count at both channel A and channel B (times 2 mode) orby counting the rising and falling of both channel inputs to give afourfold increase in the count (times 4 mode)

The encodercounter module is available in two versions

bull cat no 1771-IJ - uses a 5V dc external power supply that allowsinputs to be TTL compatible Outputs can either be driven fromthe 5V dc supply through the module or from a separate loadsupply of a different voltage

bull cat no 1771-IK - uses a 12-24V dc external power supply Inputdevices should be compatible with the voltage of the externalpower supply Outputs can be driven either from the externalsupply through the module or from a separate load supply

1ndash3Introduction

1313

The encodercounter module is shipped with two 12 terminalgold-plated Field Wiring Arms (cat no 1771-WB)

Unless otherwise noted this manual refers to both versions of themodule

There are seven status indicators (Figure 12) on the front of the lefthalf of the module The four indicators corresponding to channel Achannel B marker and switch inputs illuminate when theirrespective input signals are high The next two indicators show thestate of the outputs An output indicator is on when the outputcircuit is activated The bottom indicator illuminates when themodule detects a fault

56(7)

gt 84

1

lt

9)

9)

7

3

When system power is turned on the module runs a self-test Duringpower-up it is normal for the fault indicator to flash on momentarilyIf the FAULT LED does not turn off the module has detected a faultThe self-test includes checks to make sure that all counters andregisters have been reset to zero and memory is cleared If abreakdown of communication occurs during block transfer theFAULT LED will also light Bit 14 the diagnostic bit in the inputstatus word is also set anytime the FAULT LED is on

After power-up the module will stay in its reset state (outputsdisabled and counter held reset) until the necessary control bits areset in the program

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 3: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1313

13

Read this preface to familiarize yourself with this manual and tolearn how to use it properly and efficiently

We assume that you have previously used an Allen-Bradleyprogrammable controller that you are familiar with its features andthat you are familiar with the terminology we use If not read theuser manual for your processor before reading this manual

In this manual we refer to

bull the individual encoder counter module as the ldquomodulerdquobull the programmable controller as the ldquocontrollerrdquo or the

ldquoprocessorrdquo

The contents of this manual are as follows

13

$ amp ( ( )

+

- + )

( 0 ((+ ( )((

1 0 ((+ 1 )((

13 ) (( ) )( 2 $ 333

1313

) )

We use these conventions in this manual

) )

)

$

amp

Using This ManualPndash2

1313

Because of the variety of uses for the products described in thispublication those responsible for the application and use of theseproducts must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have beentaken to assure that each application and use meets all performanceand safety requirements including any applicable laws regulationscodes and standards In no event will Rockwell Automation beresponsible or liable for indirect or consequential damage resultingfrom the use or application of these products

Any illustrations charts sample programs and layout examplesshown in this publication are intended solely for purposes ofexample Since there are many variables and requirements associatedwith any particular installation Rockwell Automation does notassume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual propertyliability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in thispublication

AllenndashBradley publication SGIndash11 Safety Guidelines forApplication Installation and Maintenance of SolidndashState Control(available from your local Rockwell Automation office) describessome important differences between solidndashstate equipment andelectromechanical devices that should be taken into considerationwhen applying products such as those described in this publicationReproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication inwhole or part without written permission of Rockwell Automationis prohibited

Throughout this publication notes may be used to make you awareof safety considerations The following annotations and theiraccompanying statements help you to identify a potential hazardavoid a potential hazard and recognize the consequences of apotential hazard

WARNING

Identifies information about practices orcircumstances that can cause an explosion in ahazardous environment which may lead topersonal injury or death property damage oreconomic loss

ATTENTION

Identifies information about practices orcircumstances that may lead to personal injury ordeath property damage or economic loss

IMPORTANTIdentifies information that is critical forsuccessful application and understanding of theproduct

13

Using This Manual Pndash3

1313

This preface gave you information on how to use this manualefficiently

amp

Using This ManualPndash4

1313

1313

13 (

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 )

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1 0 -( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$-5 5 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13138 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

8$( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 +

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 0 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 6( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

)2( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) ( ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Table of Contents

amp $

-

Table of Contents

1313

13 0

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 1 0 ( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 1

2( $ 333 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) =7(gt134 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2

13

13

1313

This publication describes installation adjustments and theprogramming necessary for communication between theEncoderCounter Module (cat no 1771-IJ-IK) and a programmablecontroller processor The programming techniques given here enablethe processor to direct the operation of the encodercounter moduleand to monitor its status

The encodercounter module can be used with any Allen-Bradleyprocessor that uses the 1771 IO structure

Depending on the intended use of the encodercounter module twodifferent programming methods can be used These methods are

bull Single transfer programmingUse single transfer only if the module is in a local IO chassis andgenerally when not using preset words (If using preset wordswith single transfer you must use multiplexing as described insection titled Multiplexing in Chapter 5) If using single transferdisregard chapter 6 on block transfer

bull Block transfer programmingUse block transfer any time If using block transfer disregardchapter 5 on single transfer

The encodercounter module maintains a count independent of theprocessor of input pulses that typically originate from such devicesas quadrature type encoders high speed optical beam counters andcertain types of switches The module (Figure 11) is capable ofmaking decisions based on the count total by comparing it topreviously programmed values and activating either one or both ofits outputs based on the results of the comparison The module canalso return the accumulated count to the processor for arithmeticcomputations or display

The module also provides inputs for a marker signal from an encoderand a voltage level signal from a limit switch to allow for homepositioning In the count mode the direction of the count can bechanged either from the processor or for speed critical application atthe module itself through an external switch The maximumdetectable input pulse frequency of the module is 50kHz

3

3 413

1ndash2 Introduction

1313

56(7(

8 97 7 (11(-lt=

-9 9$

lt 9)

lt

7 ( +

3

The module will count in either BCD or binary numbers In theBCD mode the range is 000 to 999 with carry and borrow bitsprovided to cascade counters in the program The binary modeallows a higher count total with a range of 0000 to 409510 but thenumber appears at the processor in binary Additionally the modulecan improve the accuracy of certain quadrature type of encoders byadding the count at both channel A and channel B (times 2 mode) orby counting the rising and falling of both channel inputs to give afourfold increase in the count (times 4 mode)

The encodercounter module is available in two versions

bull cat no 1771-IJ - uses a 5V dc external power supply that allowsinputs to be TTL compatible Outputs can either be driven fromthe 5V dc supply through the module or from a separate loadsupply of a different voltage

bull cat no 1771-IK - uses a 12-24V dc external power supply Inputdevices should be compatible with the voltage of the externalpower supply Outputs can be driven either from the externalsupply through the module or from a separate load supply

1ndash3Introduction

1313

The encodercounter module is shipped with two 12 terminalgold-plated Field Wiring Arms (cat no 1771-WB)

Unless otherwise noted this manual refers to both versions of themodule

There are seven status indicators (Figure 12) on the front of the lefthalf of the module The four indicators corresponding to channel Achannel B marker and switch inputs illuminate when theirrespective input signals are high The next two indicators show thestate of the outputs An output indicator is on when the outputcircuit is activated The bottom indicator illuminates when themodule detects a fault

56(7)

gt 84

1

lt

9)

9)

7

3

When system power is turned on the module runs a self-test Duringpower-up it is normal for the fault indicator to flash on momentarilyIf the FAULT LED does not turn off the module has detected a faultThe self-test includes checks to make sure that all counters andregisters have been reset to zero and memory is cleared If abreakdown of communication occurs during block transfer theFAULT LED will also light Bit 14 the diagnostic bit in the inputstatus word is also set anytime the FAULT LED is on

After power-up the module will stay in its reset state (outputsdisabled and counter held reset) until the necessary control bits areset in the program

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 4: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

Using This ManualPndash2

1313

Because of the variety of uses for the products described in thispublication those responsible for the application and use of theseproducts must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have beentaken to assure that each application and use meets all performanceand safety requirements including any applicable laws regulationscodes and standards In no event will Rockwell Automation beresponsible or liable for indirect or consequential damage resultingfrom the use or application of these products

Any illustrations charts sample programs and layout examplesshown in this publication are intended solely for purposes ofexample Since there are many variables and requirements associatedwith any particular installation Rockwell Automation does notassume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual propertyliability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in thispublication

AllenndashBradley publication SGIndash11 Safety Guidelines forApplication Installation and Maintenance of SolidndashState Control(available from your local Rockwell Automation office) describessome important differences between solidndashstate equipment andelectromechanical devices that should be taken into considerationwhen applying products such as those described in this publicationReproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication inwhole or part without written permission of Rockwell Automationis prohibited

Throughout this publication notes may be used to make you awareof safety considerations The following annotations and theiraccompanying statements help you to identify a potential hazardavoid a potential hazard and recognize the consequences of apotential hazard

WARNING

Identifies information about practices orcircumstances that can cause an explosion in ahazardous environment which may lead topersonal injury or death property damage oreconomic loss

ATTENTION

Identifies information about practices orcircumstances that may lead to personal injury ordeath property damage or economic loss

IMPORTANTIdentifies information that is critical forsuccessful application and understanding of theproduct

13

Using This Manual Pndash3

1313

This preface gave you information on how to use this manualefficiently

amp

Using This ManualPndash4

1313

1313

13 (

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 )

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1 0 -( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$-5 5 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13138 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

8$( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 +

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 0 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 6( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

)2( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) ( ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Table of Contents

amp $

-

Table of Contents

1313

13 0

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 1 0 ( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 1

2( $ 333 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) =7(gt134 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2

13

13

1313

This publication describes installation adjustments and theprogramming necessary for communication between theEncoderCounter Module (cat no 1771-IJ-IK) and a programmablecontroller processor The programming techniques given here enablethe processor to direct the operation of the encodercounter moduleand to monitor its status

The encodercounter module can be used with any Allen-Bradleyprocessor that uses the 1771 IO structure

Depending on the intended use of the encodercounter module twodifferent programming methods can be used These methods are

bull Single transfer programmingUse single transfer only if the module is in a local IO chassis andgenerally when not using preset words (If using preset wordswith single transfer you must use multiplexing as described insection titled Multiplexing in Chapter 5) If using single transferdisregard chapter 6 on block transfer

bull Block transfer programmingUse block transfer any time If using block transfer disregardchapter 5 on single transfer

The encodercounter module maintains a count independent of theprocessor of input pulses that typically originate from such devicesas quadrature type encoders high speed optical beam counters andcertain types of switches The module (Figure 11) is capable ofmaking decisions based on the count total by comparing it topreviously programmed values and activating either one or both ofits outputs based on the results of the comparison The module canalso return the accumulated count to the processor for arithmeticcomputations or display

The module also provides inputs for a marker signal from an encoderand a voltage level signal from a limit switch to allow for homepositioning In the count mode the direction of the count can bechanged either from the processor or for speed critical application atthe module itself through an external switch The maximumdetectable input pulse frequency of the module is 50kHz

3

3 413

1ndash2 Introduction

1313

56(7(

8 97 7 (11(-lt=

-9 9$

lt 9)

lt

7 ( +

3

The module will count in either BCD or binary numbers In theBCD mode the range is 000 to 999 with carry and borrow bitsprovided to cascade counters in the program The binary modeallows a higher count total with a range of 0000 to 409510 but thenumber appears at the processor in binary Additionally the modulecan improve the accuracy of certain quadrature type of encoders byadding the count at both channel A and channel B (times 2 mode) orby counting the rising and falling of both channel inputs to give afourfold increase in the count (times 4 mode)

The encodercounter module is available in two versions

bull cat no 1771-IJ - uses a 5V dc external power supply that allowsinputs to be TTL compatible Outputs can either be driven fromthe 5V dc supply through the module or from a separate loadsupply of a different voltage

bull cat no 1771-IK - uses a 12-24V dc external power supply Inputdevices should be compatible with the voltage of the externalpower supply Outputs can be driven either from the externalsupply through the module or from a separate load supply

1ndash3Introduction

1313

The encodercounter module is shipped with two 12 terminalgold-plated Field Wiring Arms (cat no 1771-WB)

Unless otherwise noted this manual refers to both versions of themodule

There are seven status indicators (Figure 12) on the front of the lefthalf of the module The four indicators corresponding to channel Achannel B marker and switch inputs illuminate when theirrespective input signals are high The next two indicators show thestate of the outputs An output indicator is on when the outputcircuit is activated The bottom indicator illuminates when themodule detects a fault

56(7)

gt 84

1

lt

9)

9)

7

3

When system power is turned on the module runs a self-test Duringpower-up it is normal for the fault indicator to flash on momentarilyIf the FAULT LED does not turn off the module has detected a faultThe self-test includes checks to make sure that all counters andregisters have been reset to zero and memory is cleared If abreakdown of communication occurs during block transfer theFAULT LED will also light Bit 14 the diagnostic bit in the inputstatus word is also set anytime the FAULT LED is on

After power-up the module will stay in its reset state (outputsdisabled and counter held reset) until the necessary control bits areset in the program

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 5: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

Using This Manual Pndash3

1313

This preface gave you information on how to use this manualefficiently

amp

Using This ManualPndash4

1313

1313

13 (

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 )

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1 0 -( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$-5 5 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13138 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

8$( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 +

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 0 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 6( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

)2( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) ( ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Table of Contents

amp $

-

Table of Contents

1313

13 0

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 1 0 ( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 1

2( $ 333 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) =7(gt134 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2

13

13

1313

This publication describes installation adjustments and theprogramming necessary for communication between theEncoderCounter Module (cat no 1771-IJ-IK) and a programmablecontroller processor The programming techniques given here enablethe processor to direct the operation of the encodercounter moduleand to monitor its status

The encodercounter module can be used with any Allen-Bradleyprocessor that uses the 1771 IO structure

Depending on the intended use of the encodercounter module twodifferent programming methods can be used These methods are

bull Single transfer programmingUse single transfer only if the module is in a local IO chassis andgenerally when not using preset words (If using preset wordswith single transfer you must use multiplexing as described insection titled Multiplexing in Chapter 5) If using single transferdisregard chapter 6 on block transfer

bull Block transfer programmingUse block transfer any time If using block transfer disregardchapter 5 on single transfer

The encodercounter module maintains a count independent of theprocessor of input pulses that typically originate from such devicesas quadrature type encoders high speed optical beam counters andcertain types of switches The module (Figure 11) is capable ofmaking decisions based on the count total by comparing it topreviously programmed values and activating either one or both ofits outputs based on the results of the comparison The module canalso return the accumulated count to the processor for arithmeticcomputations or display

The module also provides inputs for a marker signal from an encoderand a voltage level signal from a limit switch to allow for homepositioning In the count mode the direction of the count can bechanged either from the processor or for speed critical application atthe module itself through an external switch The maximumdetectable input pulse frequency of the module is 50kHz

3

3 413

1ndash2 Introduction

1313

56(7(

8 97 7 (11(-lt=

-9 9$

lt 9)

lt

7 ( +

3

The module will count in either BCD or binary numbers In theBCD mode the range is 000 to 999 with carry and borrow bitsprovided to cascade counters in the program The binary modeallows a higher count total with a range of 0000 to 409510 but thenumber appears at the processor in binary Additionally the modulecan improve the accuracy of certain quadrature type of encoders byadding the count at both channel A and channel B (times 2 mode) orby counting the rising and falling of both channel inputs to give afourfold increase in the count (times 4 mode)

The encodercounter module is available in two versions

bull cat no 1771-IJ - uses a 5V dc external power supply that allowsinputs to be TTL compatible Outputs can either be driven fromthe 5V dc supply through the module or from a separate loadsupply of a different voltage

bull cat no 1771-IK - uses a 12-24V dc external power supply Inputdevices should be compatible with the voltage of the externalpower supply Outputs can be driven either from the externalsupply through the module or from a separate load supply

1ndash3Introduction

1313

The encodercounter module is shipped with two 12 terminalgold-plated Field Wiring Arms (cat no 1771-WB)

Unless otherwise noted this manual refers to both versions of themodule

There are seven status indicators (Figure 12) on the front of the lefthalf of the module The four indicators corresponding to channel Achannel B marker and switch inputs illuminate when theirrespective input signals are high The next two indicators show thestate of the outputs An output indicator is on when the outputcircuit is activated The bottom indicator illuminates when themodule detects a fault

56(7)

gt 84

1

lt

9)

9)

7

3

When system power is turned on the module runs a self-test Duringpower-up it is normal for the fault indicator to flash on momentarilyIf the FAULT LED does not turn off the module has detected a faultThe self-test includes checks to make sure that all counters andregisters have been reset to zero and memory is cleared If abreakdown of communication occurs during block transfer theFAULT LED will also light Bit 14 the diagnostic bit in the inputstatus word is also set anytime the FAULT LED is on

After power-up the module will stay in its reset state (outputsdisabled and counter held reset) until the necessary control bits areset in the program

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 6: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

Using This ManualPndash4

1313

1313

13 (

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 )

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1 0 -( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$-5 5 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13138 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

8$( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 +

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 0 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 6( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

)2( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) ( ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Table of Contents

amp $

-

Table of Contents

1313

13 0

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 1 0 ( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 1

2( $ 333 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) =7(gt134 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2

13

13

1313

This publication describes installation adjustments and theprogramming necessary for communication between theEncoderCounter Module (cat no 1771-IJ-IK) and a programmablecontroller processor The programming techniques given here enablethe processor to direct the operation of the encodercounter moduleand to monitor its status

The encodercounter module can be used with any Allen-Bradleyprocessor that uses the 1771 IO structure

Depending on the intended use of the encodercounter module twodifferent programming methods can be used These methods are

bull Single transfer programmingUse single transfer only if the module is in a local IO chassis andgenerally when not using preset words (If using preset wordswith single transfer you must use multiplexing as described insection titled Multiplexing in Chapter 5) If using single transferdisregard chapter 6 on block transfer

bull Block transfer programmingUse block transfer any time If using block transfer disregardchapter 5 on single transfer

The encodercounter module maintains a count independent of theprocessor of input pulses that typically originate from such devicesas quadrature type encoders high speed optical beam counters andcertain types of switches The module (Figure 11) is capable ofmaking decisions based on the count total by comparing it topreviously programmed values and activating either one or both ofits outputs based on the results of the comparison The module canalso return the accumulated count to the processor for arithmeticcomputations or display

The module also provides inputs for a marker signal from an encoderand a voltage level signal from a limit switch to allow for homepositioning In the count mode the direction of the count can bechanged either from the processor or for speed critical application atthe module itself through an external switch The maximumdetectable input pulse frequency of the module is 50kHz

3

3 413

1ndash2 Introduction

1313

56(7(

8 97 7 (11(-lt=

-9 9$

lt 9)

lt

7 ( +

3

The module will count in either BCD or binary numbers In theBCD mode the range is 000 to 999 with carry and borrow bitsprovided to cascade counters in the program The binary modeallows a higher count total with a range of 0000 to 409510 but thenumber appears at the processor in binary Additionally the modulecan improve the accuracy of certain quadrature type of encoders byadding the count at both channel A and channel B (times 2 mode) orby counting the rising and falling of both channel inputs to give afourfold increase in the count (times 4 mode)

The encodercounter module is available in two versions

bull cat no 1771-IJ - uses a 5V dc external power supply that allowsinputs to be TTL compatible Outputs can either be driven fromthe 5V dc supply through the module or from a separate loadsupply of a different voltage

bull cat no 1771-IK - uses a 12-24V dc external power supply Inputdevices should be compatible with the voltage of the externalpower supply Outputs can be driven either from the externalsupply through the module or from a separate load supply

1ndash3Introduction

1313

The encodercounter module is shipped with two 12 terminalgold-plated Field Wiring Arms (cat no 1771-WB)

Unless otherwise noted this manual refers to both versions of themodule

There are seven status indicators (Figure 12) on the front of the lefthalf of the module The four indicators corresponding to channel Achannel B marker and switch inputs illuminate when theirrespective input signals are high The next two indicators show thestate of the outputs An output indicator is on when the outputcircuit is activated The bottom indicator illuminates when themodule detects a fault

56(7)

gt 84

1

lt

9)

9)

7

3

When system power is turned on the module runs a self-test Duringpower-up it is normal for the fault indicator to flash on momentarilyIf the FAULT LED does not turn off the module has detected a faultThe self-test includes checks to make sure that all counters andregisters have been reset to zero and memory is cleared If abreakdown of communication occurs during block transfer theFAULT LED will also light Bit 14 the diagnostic bit in the inputstatus word is also set anytime the FAULT LED is on

After power-up the module will stay in its reset state (outputsdisabled and counter held reset) until the necessary control bits areset in the program

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 7: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1313

13 (

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 )

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1 0 -( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

$-5 5 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13138 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

8$( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 +

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

( 0 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 6( 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

)2( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) ( ( 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Table of Contents

amp $

-

Table of Contents

1313

13 0

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 1 0 ( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 1

2( $ 333 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) =7(gt134 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2

13

13

1313

This publication describes installation adjustments and theprogramming necessary for communication between theEncoderCounter Module (cat no 1771-IJ-IK) and a programmablecontroller processor The programming techniques given here enablethe processor to direct the operation of the encodercounter moduleand to monitor its status

The encodercounter module can be used with any Allen-Bradleyprocessor that uses the 1771 IO structure

Depending on the intended use of the encodercounter module twodifferent programming methods can be used These methods are

bull Single transfer programmingUse single transfer only if the module is in a local IO chassis andgenerally when not using preset words (If using preset wordswith single transfer you must use multiplexing as described insection titled Multiplexing in Chapter 5) If using single transferdisregard chapter 6 on block transfer

bull Block transfer programmingUse block transfer any time If using block transfer disregardchapter 5 on single transfer

The encodercounter module maintains a count independent of theprocessor of input pulses that typically originate from such devicesas quadrature type encoders high speed optical beam counters andcertain types of switches The module (Figure 11) is capable ofmaking decisions based on the count total by comparing it topreviously programmed values and activating either one or both ofits outputs based on the results of the comparison The module canalso return the accumulated count to the processor for arithmeticcomputations or display

The module also provides inputs for a marker signal from an encoderand a voltage level signal from a limit switch to allow for homepositioning In the count mode the direction of the count can bechanged either from the processor or for speed critical application atthe module itself through an external switch The maximumdetectable input pulse frequency of the module is 50kHz

3

3 413

1ndash2 Introduction

1313

56(7(

8 97 7 (11(-lt=

-9 9$

lt 9)

lt

7 ( +

3

The module will count in either BCD or binary numbers In theBCD mode the range is 000 to 999 with carry and borrow bitsprovided to cascade counters in the program The binary modeallows a higher count total with a range of 0000 to 409510 but thenumber appears at the processor in binary Additionally the modulecan improve the accuracy of certain quadrature type of encoders byadding the count at both channel A and channel B (times 2 mode) orby counting the rising and falling of both channel inputs to give afourfold increase in the count (times 4 mode)

The encodercounter module is available in two versions

bull cat no 1771-IJ - uses a 5V dc external power supply that allowsinputs to be TTL compatible Outputs can either be driven fromthe 5V dc supply through the module or from a separate loadsupply of a different voltage

bull cat no 1771-IK - uses a 12-24V dc external power supply Inputdevices should be compatible with the voltage of the externalpower supply Outputs can be driven either from the externalsupply through the module or from a separate load supply

1ndash3Introduction

1313

The encodercounter module is shipped with two 12 terminalgold-plated Field Wiring Arms (cat no 1771-WB)

Unless otherwise noted this manual refers to both versions of themodule

There are seven status indicators (Figure 12) on the front of the lefthalf of the module The four indicators corresponding to channel Achannel B marker and switch inputs illuminate when theirrespective input signals are high The next two indicators show thestate of the outputs An output indicator is on when the outputcircuit is activated The bottom indicator illuminates when themodule detects a fault

56(7)

gt 84

1

lt

9)

9)

7

3

When system power is turned on the module runs a self-test Duringpower-up it is normal for the fault indicator to flash on momentarilyIf the FAULT LED does not turn off the module has detected a faultThe self-test includes checks to make sure that all counters andregisters have been reset to zero and memory is cleared If abreakdown of communication occurs during block transfer theFAULT LED will also light Bit 14 the diagnostic bit in the inputstatus word is also set anytime the FAULT LED is on

After power-up the module will stay in its reset state (outputsdisabled and counter held reset) until the necessary control bits areset in the program

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 8: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

Table of Contents

1313

13 0

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

9) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2) 1 0 ( 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

lt 7$ 34 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

13 1

2( $ 333 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6( 5) =7(gt134 134 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1313

) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2

13

13

1313

This publication describes installation adjustments and theprogramming necessary for communication between theEncoderCounter Module (cat no 1771-IJ-IK) and a programmablecontroller processor The programming techniques given here enablethe processor to direct the operation of the encodercounter moduleand to monitor its status

The encodercounter module can be used with any Allen-Bradleyprocessor that uses the 1771 IO structure

Depending on the intended use of the encodercounter module twodifferent programming methods can be used These methods are

bull Single transfer programmingUse single transfer only if the module is in a local IO chassis andgenerally when not using preset words (If using preset wordswith single transfer you must use multiplexing as described insection titled Multiplexing in Chapter 5) If using single transferdisregard chapter 6 on block transfer

bull Block transfer programmingUse block transfer any time If using block transfer disregardchapter 5 on single transfer

The encodercounter module maintains a count independent of theprocessor of input pulses that typically originate from such devicesas quadrature type encoders high speed optical beam counters andcertain types of switches The module (Figure 11) is capable ofmaking decisions based on the count total by comparing it topreviously programmed values and activating either one or both ofits outputs based on the results of the comparison The module canalso return the accumulated count to the processor for arithmeticcomputations or display

The module also provides inputs for a marker signal from an encoderand a voltage level signal from a limit switch to allow for homepositioning In the count mode the direction of the count can bechanged either from the processor or for speed critical application atthe module itself through an external switch The maximumdetectable input pulse frequency of the module is 50kHz

3

3 413

1ndash2 Introduction

1313

56(7(

8 97 7 (11(-lt=

-9 9$

lt 9)

lt

7 ( +

3

The module will count in either BCD or binary numbers In theBCD mode the range is 000 to 999 with carry and borrow bitsprovided to cascade counters in the program The binary modeallows a higher count total with a range of 0000 to 409510 but thenumber appears at the processor in binary Additionally the modulecan improve the accuracy of certain quadrature type of encoders byadding the count at both channel A and channel B (times 2 mode) orby counting the rising and falling of both channel inputs to give afourfold increase in the count (times 4 mode)

The encodercounter module is available in two versions

bull cat no 1771-IJ - uses a 5V dc external power supply that allowsinputs to be TTL compatible Outputs can either be driven fromthe 5V dc supply through the module or from a separate loadsupply of a different voltage

bull cat no 1771-IK - uses a 12-24V dc external power supply Inputdevices should be compatible with the voltage of the externalpower supply Outputs can be driven either from the externalsupply through the module or from a separate load supply

1ndash3Introduction

1313

The encodercounter module is shipped with two 12 terminalgold-plated Field Wiring Arms (cat no 1771-WB)

Unless otherwise noted this manual refers to both versions of themodule

There are seven status indicators (Figure 12) on the front of the lefthalf of the module The four indicators corresponding to channel Achannel B marker and switch inputs illuminate when theirrespective input signals are high The next two indicators show thestate of the outputs An output indicator is on when the outputcircuit is activated The bottom indicator illuminates when themodule detects a fault

56(7)

gt 84

1

lt

9)

9)

7

3

When system power is turned on the module runs a self-test Duringpower-up it is normal for the fault indicator to flash on momentarilyIf the FAULT LED does not turn off the module has detected a faultThe self-test includes checks to make sure that all counters andregisters have been reset to zero and memory is cleared If abreakdown of communication occurs during block transfer theFAULT LED will also light Bit 14 the diagnostic bit in the inputstatus word is also set anytime the FAULT LED is on

After power-up the module will stay in its reset state (outputsdisabled and counter held reset) until the necessary control bits areset in the program

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 9: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1313

This publication describes installation adjustments and theprogramming necessary for communication between theEncoderCounter Module (cat no 1771-IJ-IK) and a programmablecontroller processor The programming techniques given here enablethe processor to direct the operation of the encodercounter moduleand to monitor its status

The encodercounter module can be used with any Allen-Bradleyprocessor that uses the 1771 IO structure

Depending on the intended use of the encodercounter module twodifferent programming methods can be used These methods are

bull Single transfer programmingUse single transfer only if the module is in a local IO chassis andgenerally when not using preset words (If using preset wordswith single transfer you must use multiplexing as described insection titled Multiplexing in Chapter 5) If using single transferdisregard chapter 6 on block transfer

bull Block transfer programmingUse block transfer any time If using block transfer disregardchapter 5 on single transfer

The encodercounter module maintains a count independent of theprocessor of input pulses that typically originate from such devicesas quadrature type encoders high speed optical beam counters andcertain types of switches The module (Figure 11) is capable ofmaking decisions based on the count total by comparing it topreviously programmed values and activating either one or both ofits outputs based on the results of the comparison The module canalso return the accumulated count to the processor for arithmeticcomputations or display

The module also provides inputs for a marker signal from an encoderand a voltage level signal from a limit switch to allow for homepositioning In the count mode the direction of the count can bechanged either from the processor or for speed critical application atthe module itself through an external switch The maximumdetectable input pulse frequency of the module is 50kHz

3

3 413

1ndash2 Introduction

1313

56(7(

8 97 7 (11(-lt=

-9 9$

lt 9)

lt

7 ( +

3

The module will count in either BCD or binary numbers In theBCD mode the range is 000 to 999 with carry and borrow bitsprovided to cascade counters in the program The binary modeallows a higher count total with a range of 0000 to 409510 but thenumber appears at the processor in binary Additionally the modulecan improve the accuracy of certain quadrature type of encoders byadding the count at both channel A and channel B (times 2 mode) orby counting the rising and falling of both channel inputs to give afourfold increase in the count (times 4 mode)

The encodercounter module is available in two versions

bull cat no 1771-IJ - uses a 5V dc external power supply that allowsinputs to be TTL compatible Outputs can either be driven fromthe 5V dc supply through the module or from a separate loadsupply of a different voltage

bull cat no 1771-IK - uses a 12-24V dc external power supply Inputdevices should be compatible with the voltage of the externalpower supply Outputs can be driven either from the externalsupply through the module or from a separate load supply

1ndash3Introduction

1313

The encodercounter module is shipped with two 12 terminalgold-plated Field Wiring Arms (cat no 1771-WB)

Unless otherwise noted this manual refers to both versions of themodule

There are seven status indicators (Figure 12) on the front of the lefthalf of the module The four indicators corresponding to channel Achannel B marker and switch inputs illuminate when theirrespective input signals are high The next two indicators show thestate of the outputs An output indicator is on when the outputcircuit is activated The bottom indicator illuminates when themodule detects a fault

56(7)

gt 84

1

lt

9)

9)

7

3

When system power is turned on the module runs a self-test Duringpower-up it is normal for the fault indicator to flash on momentarilyIf the FAULT LED does not turn off the module has detected a faultThe self-test includes checks to make sure that all counters andregisters have been reset to zero and memory is cleared If abreakdown of communication occurs during block transfer theFAULT LED will also light Bit 14 the diagnostic bit in the inputstatus word is also set anytime the FAULT LED is on

After power-up the module will stay in its reset state (outputsdisabled and counter held reset) until the necessary control bits areset in the program

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 10: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1ndash2 Introduction

1313

56(7(

8 97 7 (11(-lt=

-9 9$

lt 9)

lt

7 ( +

3

The module will count in either BCD or binary numbers In theBCD mode the range is 000 to 999 with carry and borrow bitsprovided to cascade counters in the program The binary modeallows a higher count total with a range of 0000 to 409510 but thenumber appears at the processor in binary Additionally the modulecan improve the accuracy of certain quadrature type of encoders byadding the count at both channel A and channel B (times 2 mode) orby counting the rising and falling of both channel inputs to give afourfold increase in the count (times 4 mode)

The encodercounter module is available in two versions

bull cat no 1771-IJ - uses a 5V dc external power supply that allowsinputs to be TTL compatible Outputs can either be driven fromthe 5V dc supply through the module or from a separate loadsupply of a different voltage

bull cat no 1771-IK - uses a 12-24V dc external power supply Inputdevices should be compatible with the voltage of the externalpower supply Outputs can be driven either from the externalsupply through the module or from a separate load supply

1ndash3Introduction

1313

The encodercounter module is shipped with two 12 terminalgold-plated Field Wiring Arms (cat no 1771-WB)

Unless otherwise noted this manual refers to both versions of themodule

There are seven status indicators (Figure 12) on the front of the lefthalf of the module The four indicators corresponding to channel Achannel B marker and switch inputs illuminate when theirrespective input signals are high The next two indicators show thestate of the outputs An output indicator is on when the outputcircuit is activated The bottom indicator illuminates when themodule detects a fault

56(7)

gt 84

1

lt

9)

9)

7

3

When system power is turned on the module runs a self-test Duringpower-up it is normal for the fault indicator to flash on momentarilyIf the FAULT LED does not turn off the module has detected a faultThe self-test includes checks to make sure that all counters andregisters have been reset to zero and memory is cleared If abreakdown of communication occurs during block transfer theFAULT LED will also light Bit 14 the diagnostic bit in the inputstatus word is also set anytime the FAULT LED is on

After power-up the module will stay in its reset state (outputsdisabled and counter held reset) until the necessary control bits areset in the program

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 11: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1ndash3Introduction

1313

The encodercounter module is shipped with two 12 terminalgold-plated Field Wiring Arms (cat no 1771-WB)

Unless otherwise noted this manual refers to both versions of themodule

There are seven status indicators (Figure 12) on the front of the lefthalf of the module The four indicators corresponding to channel Achannel B marker and switch inputs illuminate when theirrespective input signals are high The next two indicators show thestate of the outputs An output indicator is on when the outputcircuit is activated The bottom indicator illuminates when themodule detects a fault

56(7)

gt 84

1

lt

9)

9)

7

3

When system power is turned on the module runs a self-test Duringpower-up it is normal for the fault indicator to flash on momentarilyIf the FAULT LED does not turn off the module has detected a faultThe self-test includes checks to make sure that all counters andregisters have been reset to zero and memory is cleared If abreakdown of communication occurs during block transfer theFAULT LED will also light Bit 14 the diagnostic bit in the inputstatus word is also set anytime the FAULT LED is on

After power-up the module will stay in its reset state (outputsdisabled and counter held reset) until the necessary control bits areset in the program

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 12: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1ndash4 Introduction

1313

System power is supplied through the IO chassis backplane from the5V dc chassis power supply The module requires a current of 14AThe sum of the current requirements of all modules in the chassismust not exceed the power supply or backplane rating

The module requires an external power supply connected to the fieldwiring arm For the 1771-IJ the supply must be able to deliver140mA at 5V dc +025V with less than 50mV ripple peak-to-peakThe 1771-IK requires 110mA at 12V dc or 200mA at 24V dc withless than 50mV ripple peak-to-peak These requirements are for themodule only The current requirements of all output devices if theyare to be driven directly from the module must be added to therequirements of the module

It is also possible to drive output devices from a separate load supplyusing the output on the module only as a switch When the output ison and conducting a maximum of 05V dc is dropped across it Theload supply voltage should not exceed 30V dc Refer to Figure 13for the necessary modifications to the wiring diagram

56(7

13 1313 13 1313amp

lt

lt

9)gt6

6(

2

9)

15944

gtgt

2))$

))$

0

(gt

) A ))4

The power for the input device can be provided by the modulersquosexternal power supply but unlike the power for the output devicethis is not available through the module If a high degree of isolationis needed use a separate input power supply If a limit switch isused the limit switch input is configured to accept an ldquoonrdquo voltageof 12 to 48V dc requiring a maximum of 10mA at 48V dc

amp

8

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 13: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1313

The module has programming options (Table 2A) that are selectedby setting the five switches on the programming option switchassembly (SW-1) These options include the choices betweenencoder and counter operation block transfer or single transfer BCDor binary data formats and count resolution in the encoder mode

6)7

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

Block transfersingle transfer (switch 1) - Use single transferprogramming only when the module is in a local IO chassis Thistype of programming shifts a single word of data each program scanfrom the processorrsquos data table to the module It therefore takesthree program scans to send a new control word and the two presetvalues to the module However once new data has been sent to themodule it will remain active until another transfer updates it

The input status word will always appear at the proper addresslocation in the input image table To use single transferprogramming switch 1 must be set to single transfer (on)

Block transfer moves all three data words from the processor to themodule in a single scan Since the module has bidirectional blocktransfer the processor must also be programmed to read for blocktransfer or the data table will not display the status word To useblock transfer switch 1 must be set for block transfer (off)

3

2 -

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 14: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

2ndash2 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

Count resolution (switches 2 and 3) - In the encoder mode theaccuracy of a quadrature type encoder can be improved by allowingthe module to count the pulse trains at both channel inputs Thisdoubles the number of pulses counted for the same degree of rotationat the encoder A further improvement can be made by letting themodule count the leading and trailing edges of both pulse trainsthereby counting four times (times 4) for the same degree of rotationCertain applications may need the actual count and module should beset for times 1 (the pulse is counted on its rising edge as high true)The count resolution setting affects the total count kept at the moduleand as it is sent back in the status word Programming manipulationsof the status word and the preset values must account for themultipliers The count resolution setting may also be limited by theprogram scan time if the carry or borrow bits are used to cascadecounters

Note In the counter mode the count resolution setting (Table 2B)has no effect on the count

6)72

gt

13 )

0 9 9

0 9 9

0 9 9

Encodercounter selection (switch 4) - In the encoder mode themodule counts the number of input pulses entering on channel Afrom a quadrature type encoder By comparing the phaserelationship between input pulses on channel A and pulses appearingat channel B it knows whether to add or subtract the incoming countfrom the total (that is whether to count up or down) The phasing(Figure 21) between the channels is determined by the direction inwhich the encoder is turned To use the module in the encoder modeswitch 4 must be set to encoder (on)

gt

8

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 15: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

2ndash3Preliminary Adjustments

1313

56)7(

13

0

2

2

2

)

2

2

2

5

15945

In the counter mode the module adds the incoming pulses onchannel A The count is incremented on the rising edge of the pulse(high true) The direction of the count can be controlled with eitherthe control word or an external switch wired to channel B ChannelB must be left unconnected if the count direction is to be softwarecontrolled Typical input device counting might be high speed staticswitches and incremental encoders Mechanical switches are notrecommended as input counting devices used with the 1771-IJbecause the contact bounces might be counted as pulses Howeverthe 1771-IK can be used with a mechanical switch provided themodule is configured for mechanical counting (filter has been put in)and the counting frequency does not exceed 50Hz To use themodule in the counter mode switch 4 must be set to counter (off)

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 16: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

2ndash4 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

BinaryBCD data format (switch 5) - The preset values and theaccumulated total in the status word have the option of appearing ineither BCD or binary formats If the BCD format is selected theprocessor can directly manipulate these values in comparisons orarithmetic functions but the accumulated value is limited to a countbetween 000 and 999 The binary option allows an increased rangeof 0000 to 409510 With some processors the programming mustreconstruct a BCD number from the binary value To select binarymode set switch 5 on To select BCD mode set switch 5 off

Because different types of input devices are compatible withdifferent voltage ranges the 1771-IJ (5V dc) and 1771-IK (12-24Vdc) input channels are configured differently

Because the 1771-IJ module is designed to work with 5V TTL typedevices each input channel and the marker input can be set forsingle ended or differential line inputs (Table 2C) The input deviceshould be capable of providing 16mA of sink current The moduledetects a voltage of 24V dc or above at either channel as logic ldquo1rdquoor true A voltage below 06V dc is considered as logic ldquo0rdquo or false

6)7

13 amp (11( )

( )

7 2 7

( ( (

5 5 5

The marker input registers as true when the input pulse from theencoder is high

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc aslogic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as logic ldquo0rdquo (off) The inputvoltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to 48Vdc external supply capable of supplying 10mA of source current at48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16ms (+7ms)because of the filtering needed to protect against contact bounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down

2amp-24 4 5

(11(

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 17: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

2ndash5Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low The gate or switch must sink 14ma ofcurrent to pull the channel B input low The count changes directionin less than 001ms from the time channel B input changes state

The 1771-IK module is designed to accept several types of devicesthat will operate in the 12 to 24V dc range (Figure 22) Since mosthigh voltage quadrature encoder outputs produce signals through anopen collector output the module is configured for a pull-up onchannel B Channel A must be set for a pull-up by setting switch 1on and switch 2 off Some counting devices may also use a pull-uparrangement

56)7)

13 (11(lt 5

amp )

gt

gt

gt

gtgtgtgt)

gt

gt

(

15946

2gtB(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgt7

gt$gt

The settings on the input configuration switch assembly SW-2 arenot the same on the 1771-IJ as they are for 1771-IK Refer toTable 2D for switch settings

(11(lt

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 18: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

2ndash6 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

6)74

13 amp 9(11(lt= )

( )

) 7 = +C

7 7 7 =8 +C

Certain counting devices may need an input designed to pull currentdown through the device Switch 2 should be set on for pull-downand switch 1 left off The module detects a minimum of 72V dc atits input channels as true for a 12V dc external supply and 144V dcat 24V dc external supply A signal with a maximum voltage of48V dc is considered false for a 12V dc supply and 96V dc is falsefor a 24V dc supply Each input channel sinks 10mA at 12V dc and20mA at 24V dc

If it is necessary to debounce a contact type of device such as aswitch the filter can be added across the inputs by setting switch 3on By adding the filter to the circuit the maximum countingfrequency the module will detect is 50Hz

Channel B input and the marker input are for open collector encoderdrivers (the channel B input has an internal pull-up) and are notswitch selectable The marker input reads a signal as high true

The limit switch input senses a voltage of greater than 10 volts dc asa logic ldquo1rdquo (on) and less than 5 volts dc as a logic ldquo0rdquo (off) Theinput voltage that appears through the switch should be from a 12 to48V dc external supply that is capable of supplying 10mA of sourcecurrent at 48V dc The limit switch input has a signal delay of 16 ms(+7ms) because of the filtering needed to protect against contactbounce

The channel B input can be used in the counter mode to select countdirection If the channel B input terminal is not connected thecontrol word in the output program selects the direction of the countFor external hardware control the count direction bit in the controlword must be set to count up

Then if channel B is allowed to float high or is driven high themodule counts up if it is pulled low either through a gate or atransistor switch it will count down Any gate or switch should becompatible with the external voltage supply (12 to 24V dc)

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 19: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

2ndash7Preliminary Adjustments

1313

No special filtering is provided on channel B since the filteringnecessary for a mechanical switch would defeat the purpose of a veryfast count direction change that is not dependent on the processorscan time Therefore a transistor switch or gate should be used topull the channel B input low sinking 10mA at 12V dc or 20mA at24V dc The count changes direction in less than 10 microsecondsfrom the time channel B input changes state

Refer to the connection diagrams (Figures 31 and 32) forinterfacing different devices

Switch assembly settings-these features are selected on two switchassemblies that are located on the circuit board underneath thecomponent cover

To select these options proceed as follows

1 Take off the left-side cover by removing the four slotted screws2 Refer to Figure 23 Identify the programming option switch

assembly (SW-1) and the input configuration switch assembly(SW-2)

56)7+

gt

3 13

9977

9 9 7 7

) ($gt

((9)$gt

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 20: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

2ndash8 Preliminary Adjustments

1313

3 Set the switches of SW-1 (Table 2E) according to the desiredprogramming options The settings for the count resolutionswitches (times 1 2 or 4) do not matter if the counter mode hasbeen selected The tip of a ball point pen can be used to set therocker arm of a switch Do not use a pencil because the point canbreak off and jam the switch

4 Set the three switches of SW-2 (Table 2E) according to the input configurations that have been chosen

5 Replace the component cover and tighten the screws

6)78

13 amp (

( ) +

(0

0 4)

6

$

10

5

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 21: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1313

ATTENTION

Environment and EnclosureThis equipment is intended for use in a PollutionDegree 2 industrial environment in overvoltageCategory II applications (as defined in IECpublication 60664ndash1) at altitudes up to 2000meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class Aindustrial equipment according to IECCISPRPublication 11 Without appropriate precautionsthere may be potential difficulties ensuringelectromagnetic compatibility in otherenvironments due to conducted as well as radiateddisturbance

This equipment is supplied as ldquoopen typerdquoequipment It must be mounted within anenclosure that is suitably designed for thosespecific environmental conditions that will bepresent and appropriately designed to preventpersonal injury resulting from accessibility to liveparts The interior of the enclosure must beaccessible only by the use of a tool Subsequentsections of this publication may contain additionalinformation regarding specific enclosure typeratings that are required to comply with certainproduct safety certifications

See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IECpublication 60529 as applicable for explanationsof the degrees of protection provided by differenttypes of enclosures Also see the appropriatesections in this publication as well as theAllenndashBradley publication 1770ndash41 (ldquoIndustrialAutomation Wiring and Grounding Guidelinesrdquo)for additional installation requirements pertainingto this equipment

The 1771-IJ and 1771-IK are modular components of the 1771 IOsystem and require a properly installed system chassis Refer topublication 1771ndashIN075 for detailed information on acceptablechassis and proper installation and grounding requirements

8

8

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 22: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

3ndash2 Installation

1313

ATTENTION Preventing Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostaticdischarge which can cause internal damage andaffect normal operation Follow these guidelineswhen you handle this equipmentbull Touch a grounded object to discharge

potential staticbull Wear an approved grounding wriststrapbull Do not touch connectors or pins on

component boardsbull Do not touch circuit components inside the

equipmentbull If available use a staticndashsafe workstationbull When not in use keep modules in appropriate

staticndashsafe packaging

The module may be placed in any 1771 IO chassis However themodule must only be inserted in a single module group it cannotstraddle two groups To minimize noise group low voltage inputmodules together within a single IO chassis whenever possible

WARNING Remove power from the IO chassis backplane and

wiring arm before removing or installing a modulebull Failure to remove power from the backplane

could cause unexpected machine operation withpossible damage to equipment or injury topersonnel It could also damage the module ordegrade performance

bull Failure to remove power from the wiring armcould damage the module or degradeperformance

Use the proper cable to connect the input devices to the module fieldwiring arm Follow the appropriate connection diagram (Figure 31and Figure 32) Input devices cannot be more than 40 cable feetfrom the module

Use Belden 8761 cable for pulse counter applications with a signalbelow 20K Hz use Belden 9182 cable for frequencies up to 50k HzUse Belden 8725 cabe (4-twisted pair cable) for encoder applicationsbelow 20k Hz

gt

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 23: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

3ndash3Installation

1313

567(

4 amp13 (11( 8 1313

1

00lt9)

(

00lt lt9)

00lt lt9 ) 5

= -9 61

B 2

))$

(

) 5

lt

9) D

9)6

3

13

3

13

3

) ) A ))4

B ))$

9) D

E ( 2 ))$ A ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

If you use the limit switch you must use shielded cable such asBelden 8761 or 9182 for cabling

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 24: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

3ndash4 Installation

1313

567)

4 amp13 (11(lt 1313

8 4

1

(

B

B

B 2 ))$

(

5

-9 9$

0

lt

33

gt

13

3

13

3

9) D

B

))$ $

) ) A ))4

9) D

E 2 )) A ( ))$ ( 44

E 0 ) ( () =4

lt

lt

The cable has a foil shield with a bare drain wire The drain wireshould be connected to the enclosure ground at an IO chassismounting bolt or stud Connect the drain wire at only one end Thefoil and drain at the other end of the cable which connects to thedevice should be cut short and taped back to insulate it from anyelectrical contact

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 25: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

3ndash5Installation

1313

Plastic keying bands provide an easy method for keying an IO slotto accept only one type of module Use of keying bands is stronglyrecommended to prevent accidental insertion of the wrong type ofmodule

The module is slotted in two places on its rear edge The position ofthe keying bands on the backplane connector must correspond tothese slots to allow insertion of the module Because the moduleuses two slots both slots have to be keyed Snap the keying bandson the upper backplane connectors between these numbers printed onthe backplane (Table 3A) Keying is different for the 1771-IJ andthe 1771-IK

67

ltamp

gt

1313

13138

IMPORTANTInsert the module in a single module group (slots0 and 1) It must not straddle two modulegroups

The position of the these keying bands may be changed if subsequentsystem design and rewiring makes insertion of a different type ofmodule necessary

Complete specifications for the 1771-IJ and -IK modules arecontained in Appendix A

ltamp

13

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 26: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

3ndash6 Installation

1313

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 27: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1313

Communication between the processor and the encodercountermodule is bidirectional This means that information is transferredto and from the module the processor instructs the module toperform specific functions and may provide values to be comparedon the module and used for output control the module transmits itsaccumulated count and other status information to the processorBecause both input and output data are transmitted between thismodule and the processor special programming techniques are usedto coordinate and control this bidirectional data transfer

Complete 16ndashbit words are transferred between the module and theprocessor The processor sends up to 3 words of data to theencodercounter module

Control wordPreset word 1Preset word 2

These are termed the output words since they are output with respectto the programThe encodercounter module sends a status word to the processor

Figure 41 shows the transfer of output and input words inbidirectional moduleprocessor communication described in thefollowing paragraphs

56+7(

2 -

3-gtAgt4gt4gt1313-8

9)gt

)gt

9)

gt

gtgtgtD

gtgtD

3

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 28: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

4ndash2 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

The program controls encodercounter module operation through theoutput words These words function as follows

bull Control word ndash the control word as its name implies instructs themodule on its operation and on control of its own outputs Bysetting specific control word bits you set up the modulersquos initialmode of operation and can subsequently alter module operationas the application requires

bull Preset words 1 and 2 ndash the optional preset words are values thatcan be used for comparison by the module When these wordsare used the module controls its own output based on comparisonbetween its accumulated count preset values You can use thesewords to direct module control of its own output terminalsindependent of the timing of the processor IO and programscans

Stored in the data table these output words are sent to the module ascontrolled by the program The storage and transmission of thesewords to the module differ depending on whether single transfer orblock transfer programming is used In addition the bitndashbyndashbitsignificance of these words is dependent on the data transfer methodused For this reason specific information on the storage andcomposition of these words is given separately in the followingchapters which describe each programming method

The input status word is the single input word received from theencodercounter module This word has the same format for bothblock and single transfer programming The input status word hasthe format of Figure 42

56+7)

13 2

13 13

gtAgt$gt

gtAgtgt

gtAgt(gtgtFgtgt gtgtFgtgt)

( 5gt5(

=3

5gt5(

=3

lt( 5gt5(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

15951

13A E

1 ) (

) 06

+ 9

13

13

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 29: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

4ndash3ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

Bits 00ndash13 of this word show the accumulated count kept by themodule This count may be stored either in BCD form as 000ndash999(decimal) or in 12ndashbit binary form as a binary value from 0000 00000000 to 1111 1111 1111 A switch selection set during moduleinstallation determines the numerical form in which the accumulatedcount is stored

Bits 14ndash17 of this input word serve as status bits Bit 14 thediagnostic bit is set to 1 if the module has detected a fault in its ownoperation normally this bit is 0 Bits 15 and 16 are the carry andborrow bits respectively These bits indicate whether the count hasoverflowed or underflowed

Bit 17 of the input status word is the home bit Three conditions arerequired to set this bit to 1

bull Marker input is highbull Limit switch input is true (high)bull Home latch enable bit is on (1)The marker and limit switch input devices connect to module inputterminals The home latch enable bit is in the control word one ofthe three output words Note that the home bit once set to 1remains 1 until the home latch enable bit is reset to 0

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 30: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

4ndash4 ModuleProcessor Communication

1313

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 31: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

13

1313

13

Single transfer programming is one method for coordinating andcontrolling bidirectional moduleprocessor communication Thismethod can only be used when the module is in a local IO chassis

Single transfer may be the recommended method even where blocktransfer capability is available Specifically single transferprogramming is suggested whenever preset 1 words and 2 are notused When one or both preset words are used block transfermethods may be more efficient depending on the application

The material for single transfer programming is organized asfollows

bull Section titled Output Words - Single Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using single transfermethods

bull Section titled Single Transfer Description gives a generaldescription of how single transfer programming works and anexample for applications where no preset words are required

bull Section titled Multiplexing shows how multiple words of outputdata are multiplexed in single transfer

bull Section titled Example Program - Single Transfer gives asample program for single transfer programming

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen single transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bits in these words to the desired combinationfor the application Then using single transfer techniques theprogram sends these output words to the module

13

Figure 51 shows the configuration of the output control word forsingle transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 32: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash2 Single Transfer Programming

1313

567(

13 13

gtAgt

gtGgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtHgt6gtD

gtFgt6gtD

gtGgt6gtDgt13Agt+ltgtgtFgtgtFgt5

2

((

2

(

5

6Agtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$gt)(gt 4

13A 4 ) 4

A 7 =

A) D F 0 F 7

A) D F 0 F 7

= 9$ A )-5 F ) F 5

A 9) F F 5

3

5662

Bits 14-17 of this word are word select bits These bits must havethe setting shown in Figure 51 to identify the word as the outputcontrol word

Bit 13 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrols module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each countreceived on channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each receivedon channel A

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 33: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash3Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note that if a device is wired to channel B for external control ofcount direction the updown bit must be set to 1 Count directioncan be externally controlled by using a transistor switch as describedin chapters 2 and 3

Bit 12 is the enable outputs bit The state of this bit controls moduleoutputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the output module can beenergized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 12 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset values setby the program

Bits 10 and 11 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting operation of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 51 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bit 07 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero only when all three of theseconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 07) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 51

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 07) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe marker input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 11and 10 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 34: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash4 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bits 00-05 are significant only when one or both preset words areused These bits establish the comparison conditions for modulecontrol of its outputs As Figure 51 shows bits 00-02 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 1 bits 03-05 set upparameters for comparison with preset word 2 The module thencontrols its output 1 or 2 based on the true or false comparison ofits accumulated count with these presets

When any of these bits is set to 1 the indicated condition isconsidered by the module as true (that is as a true condition enablingthe module to turn on its output) As Figure 51 shows one bit isused for each comparison parameter less than equal to or greaterthan Note that more than one of these bits can be set to 1 for eachpreset allowing such combinations as less than or equal to greaterthan or equal to or not equal to

In single transfer communication the preset words have the formatof Figure 52 and Figure 53 In this format bits 00-13 store thepreset value When BCD operation has been selected these bits mayrepresent a 3-digit value from 000-999 When 12-bit binaryoperation has been selected the value may range from 0 to 11111111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) A module switch selection madeduring installation selects either BCD or binary mode

567)

A(

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

5gt5(5gt5(

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 35: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash5Single Transfer Programming

1313

567

A)

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

Agtgt$gtgt

gtB

3

13 F A ) D44

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

5gt5(5gt5(

Note that bits 14-17 have a unique coding to identify each presetword

Note If BCD operation has been switch selected only BCD digitsshould be entered in the data table word output to the module Ifnon-BCD digits are entered in a preset value the module sets itsdefault preset value to 000 for the word

Single transfer programming uses the IO scan for bidirectionalmoduleprocessor communication The IO scan is an automaticfunction of the processor during which it performs two operations itwrites output image table data to IO modules and reads IO moduledata into the input image table The write cycle of the IO scan mustbe manipulated by the program for communication with theencodercounter module By this manipulation up to three 16-bitwords are sent to the module by using one output image table wordThe read cycle of the IO scan is also used but is not manipulated bythe program since only a single input status word is read from themodule

413

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 36: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash6 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Bidirectional single transfer programming then requires both aninput image table and an output image table word The addresses ofthese image table words depend on the location of the IO module inthe chassis For example for modules in IO rack 1 module group6 the corresponding output image table word is 016 the input imagetable word is 116 Because the encodercounter module occupiesone module group in the IO chassis the processor writes onecomplete 16-bit output image table word to the module and readsone complete 16-bit input image table word from the module duringeach IO scan Figure 54 shows the relationship of module slotplacement to image table location in memory

567+

813 - gt13

13

9)

)

9) =

) 6 gt gtgt=gtgt gt gt gt gt gtgt gtgt gt gt gtgtgt gt

- -9 61 4 ) 4

15955

The input image table word the means for reading data from themodule is updated automatically by the processor each IO scan Toexamine the input status word from the module the program onlyneeds to examine the word stored at the input image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercounter module

The output image table word the means for writing data to themodule is sent by the processor automatically each IO scan Inapplications where only the output control word is used this wordcan be stored directly in the output image table locationcorresponding to the placement of the encodercount moduleSection titled Example Rungs-No Preset Words Used shows thetype of program needed for this type of communication

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 37: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash7Single Transfer Programming

1313

However in some applications one or both preset words must beused Here the complication involving the output image table wordis readily apparent it must be used to serve multiple purposes notonly will this word send the output control word it is also needed tosend one or both preset words to the module The use of this wordfor more than one purpose is termed multiplexing For multiplexingprogram manipulation and coordination of the control of the outputimage table word are necessary Sections titled Multiplexing andExample Program - Single Transfer describe multiplexing forsingle transfer communication

813 gt

Figure 55 illustrates a typical example in which bidirectional singletransfer occurs assuming that no preset words are used Thisexample assumes the module placement shown in Figure 54

There is no manipulation of intermediate storage words when onlythe output control word is needed Thus in this instance the bits inthe output image table word corresponding to the module are setdirectly to determine the modulersquos control function In the exampleof Figure 55 rungs 1-3 turn on various bits in the output word Bitsare 0 unless set to 1 by a program instruction Here it is assumedthat no other use is made of word 016

567

813 gt 9 =

13

6(gt

4

13

gtgtgt5Agtgtgtgt5$gt7gt

7

2gt)gtgtB

3

H

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 38: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash8 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Rung 4 shows the input status word examined in the user programNote that this word is automatically in the input image table whensingle transfer is selected The processor automatically updates thisword each IO scan

In summary when you are not using preset words you need only setbits of the output image table word which corresponds to the moduleThis word then serves as the output control word However whenusing one or both preset words the output image table word is usedfor multiple purposes and intermediate storage word addresses mustbe used for output control and preset word storage The followingsections outline methods for multiplexing the output words in suchapplications

The processor writes a single word - the output image table word - tothe encodercounter module each IO scan Multiplexing is aprogramming technique by which the processor can share this singleoutput image table word and use it to send multiple words to themodule one word at a time Multiplexing therefore is useful whenone or more preset words are needed

Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing of events in theprogram The program must coordinate control of the output imagetable word such Multiplexing requires an orderly sequencing ofevents in the program The program must coordinate control of theoutput image table work such that it sends the intended output wordwhether control or preset to the module In this publication a scancounter is used for this coordination While it is not the only methodof control for multiplexing the scan counter is a direct and easilyunderstood method and can be used with any PLC or PLC-2 familyprocessor

To understand the scan counterrsquos function consider how informationmust be transferred to the module In one program scan theprocessor stores the word that is to be sent to the module in theoutput image table word for the module During the very next IOscan the processor automatically outputs the image table word to themodule

Table 5A lists a sequence of operation for single transfer in a typicalapplication showing what must happen at each value of the scancounter This example assumes that both preset words are used Ifonly one of the preset words is needed only counts 1 and 2 of thescan counter are necessary

13

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 39: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash9Single Transfer Programming

1313

67

B

C(D 8 -

0 ) )

0 D ) )

0 D ) )

C(D0 ltA lt-A lt-A

lt 4 7 lt A E A A

)$4

The scan counter must indicate that both an IO scan and a programscan have occurred For PLC-2 PLC-215 PLC-220 and PLC-230Processors and the Mini-Processor Module the IO scan andprogram scan because they are sequential are synchronous oneprogram scan occurs for each IO scan This means the scan countercan simply be incremented each program scan Section titled ScanCounter - PLC-2 Family Processors describes a suitable scancounter for these processors

With the PLC processor however the IO scan and program scan areasynchronous this means that the scan counter must be programmedto increment based on the longer of the two scans Section titledScan Counter - PLC Processor describes a suitable scan counterfor these processors

With the sample program following note that the scan counter isprogrammed to run continuously it resets itself when theaccumulated value equals the preset value and begins to count againThis arrangement is normally preferred because it allows subsequentprogrammed changes in bits of the output control word to be sent tothe module as soon as possible after the change is made

) 5amp

Figure 56 shows an example scan counter that can be used for anyPLC-2 family processor This type of scan counter increments witheach program scan Because the IO and program scans of theseprocessors are synchronous each increment of this scan counterindicates that both an IO scan and a program scan have occurred

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 40: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash10 Single Transfer Programming

1313

5670

)

0

6

0

6

gt 313

The output instruction of both rungs in Figure 56 is an up-counter(CTU) instruction The first rung since it is unconditional is alwaystrue The second rung since a branch end instruction by itself isalways false sets the conditions for the counter as false Because anup-counter (CTU) increments for each false to true transition CTU030 registers one count each time the program scan occurs

Figure 57 shows an example scan counter that can be used for aPLC processor Because the IO and program scans of this processorare asynchronous this scan counter differs in form and operationfrom the scan counter for PLC-2 processors

5671

0

6

6(

lt

13

13

-

4

3

-

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 41: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash11Single Transfer Programming

1313

In order to keep track of both IO and program scans the PLC scancounter rungs manipulate a particular type of memory bit This mustbe a bit in the input image table which is not wired to acorresponding input device so that the bit is turned off each IOscan Choose a bit which satisfies all of the following conditions

bull is in a module group that is scanned immediately after theencodercounter module is scanned

bull is an actual terminal address on an installed input modulebull is off at all timesThe first condition requires a brief knowledge of IO scansequencing The remote IO PLC processor scans IO modules inorder of module group no It first scans module group 0 in all IOracks then module group 1 then 2 and so on Therefore whenselecting an input image table bit for scan counter control choose abit with a greater module group no than the module group no of theencodercounter module If the encodercounter module is placed inmodule group 7 and unused input in module group 0 would beappropriate for this purpose Note that the IO rack number is of noconsequence in selecting this bit

The second condition requires that this input address correspond toan actual input module terminal of the controller

For the third condition it is suggested that the input terminal at theaddress be connected to the L2 (AC low) or DC COMMON terminalon the input module wiring arm This helps prevent the terminalfrom being connected to an input device at some later time

In Figure 57 it is assumed that bit 11111 satisfies all three of theseconditions

The IO scan and program scan both manipulate bit 11111 In rung1 this bit is examined as an input condition for the scan counterWhen this bit is OFF CTU 200 increments When CTU 200increments bit 20017 is set on In rung 2 bit 20017 latches bit11111 on Then in rung 3 bit 20017 is turned off Bit 11111 remainson until the next IO scan With this arrangement CTU 0 cannotincrement until both an IO scan and program scan occur

Note that for the PLC processor two scan counts are used betweeneach step in single transfer as indicated in NO TAG

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 42: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash12 Single Transfer Programming

1313

Note In some applications it may be feasible to designate an inputlocation for the purpose of scan counter control In this instance anon-delay timer (TON) instruction can be used to multiplex outputdata to the encodercounter module A timer with 01-secondresolution is acceptable for this purpose Each step of Table 5A canbe programmed to be executed at a 01-second interval from theprevious step

Figure 58 is an example program for single-transfer multiplexing ofoutput words to the encodercounter module This example uses thetype of scan counter recommended for PLC-2 processors Howeverthe general format of these rungs would be the same for a PLCprocessor with addressing differences substitution of the type ofscan counter shown in Figure 57 and other minor changes

567E

813

0

6

0

6

gt

0

0

0

9)

9)gtD

9)

6

gtD

7gtgtltgt)Agtgt gtgtgtgtgtgt(gtAgtgtgt(gt4

6(4

33

F

F

F

06

813

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 43: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash13Single Transfer Programming

1313

The following assumptions are made for this sample program

bull Encodercounter module is in IO rack 1 module group 2bull Output control word is stored in word 051bull Preset words 1 and 2 are stored in words 052 and 053

respectivelybull The scan counter is recycled as shown in rung 6 This allows

continuous update of the module should output values be changedby the program

For this example it is assumed that the bit patterns of the outputwords are set up elsewhere in the program

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 44: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

5ndash14 Single Transfer Programming

1313

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 45: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1313

13

Block transfer programming is available with all Allen-Bradleyprocessors that use the 1771 IO structure

Block transfer is specifically intended for use with IO modules suchas the encodercounter module that perform more complexoperations than simple onoff input sensing or output switching Forthe operation of such modules multiple words of data must betransferred to or from the processor

Block transfer can be particularly useful with the encodercountermodule when more than one word must be output to the module thatis when one or both preset words are used By using block transferin these applications you can avoid any involvement withmultiplexing techniques for moduleprocessor communicationMultiplexing techniques are used in single transfer programming asdescribed in chapter 5 Note however that single transfertechniques can be the easiest to use in any application where only asingle output control word must be sent to the module For thisreason when not using any of the preset words use single transferprogramming for moduleprocessor communication

The material for block transfer is organized as follows

bull Section titled Output Words - Block Transfer describes theconfiguration of output words when using block transfer

bull Section titled Example Block Transfer Programs describesblock transfer ladder logic for PLC -2 PLC-3 and PLC-5 familyprocessors

The output control and preset words have a unique configurationwhen block transfer programming has been selected Initially theprogram must set the bit combinations of these words to the properarrangement for the application Then through block transfer thesewords are transmitted to the encodercounter module

13

Figure 61 shows the configuration of the output control word forblock transfer By setting bits in this word you set up the initialmode of module operation and change it as required duringoperation

3

13 2

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 46: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

6ndash2 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607(

2

EacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacuteEacute

13 13

2

(

2

5

4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt4

6gtgtgtgtgtgt(gt($4

Agtgt2gt)$)(gt 4

65662

7 = 0

A )- F ) F

=( $

A ) 5

A + lt 5

13A 4$ $ (

15960

Bit 04 is the home latch enable bit

The module resets the count to zero when all three of the followingconditions are true

bull Home latch enable bit (bit 04) is set to 1bull Marker input is highbull Home limit switch is closed (limit switch LED is on)The count remains at zero until one or more of these conditions gofalse Then module operation follows the function control bitsdescribed in Figure 61

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 47: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

6ndash3Block Transfer Programming

1313

The module indicates it has reset its count to zero by setting thehome bit (bit 17 in the input status word) It resets this bit when thehome latch enable bit (bit 04) is reset (Refer to Figure 42 InputStatus Word)

The system can bring the machine back to a repeatable startingposition and the module count can be reset to zero by toggling eitherthe market input or home limit switch rather than changing bits 01and 00 in the control word as long as the three conditions are met

Carry and borrow bits are not affected by resetting the module countThe home limit switch LED turns on whenever the home limitswitch is closed

Bit 03 of this word is the updown bit This bit is significant onlywhen the module is used in the counter mode The state of this bitcontrol module function as follows

1 -The module increments its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on Channel A

0 -The module decrements its accumulated count with each pulsereceived on channel A

Note that if a device is wired to the Channel B input of the modulefor external count direction the updown bit must be set to 1

Bit 02 is the enable outputs bit The status of this bit controlsmodule outputs as follows

1 -Outputs enabled This means that the outputs of the module canbe energized based on logical operations performed by the module

0 -Outputs disabled This means that the outputs of the modulecannot be energized

With bit 02 set to 1 the module can energize its output terminalsbased on a comparison of its accumulated count and preset valuesentered by the program

Bits 00 and 01 are termed function control bits These bits controlmodule function in both encoder and counter modes They permitthe counting function of the module to be enabled or reset by theprogram The table in Figure 61 shows the bit settings for eachfunction

Bits 05-17 of this word are not used by the module and may haveany setting

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 48: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

6ndash4 Block Transfer Programming

1313

In block transfer communication preset words 1 and 2 have theformat of Figure 62 Here bits 00-13 store the preset value WhenBCD operation has been selected these bits may represent a valuefrom 000-999 When 12-bit binary operation has been selected thevalue may range from 0 to 1111 1111 1111 binary (4095 decimal) Amodule switch selection is made during installation to select eitherBCD or binary mode

5607)

2

13 13

( 5gt5(

=3

=3

lt(

=3

gtB

Agtgt$gtgt

gtGgt6

gtFgt6gtHgt6

gtAgt

15961

13A) B

5gt5(5gt5(

gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt gt$gtgt5gt

Note If BCD operation has been selected only BCD digits shouldbe entered in the data table word output to the module If non-BCDdigits are entered in a preset value the module sets its default presetvalue to 000 for that word

Bits 15-17 establish the comparison to be made by the modulebetween its accumulated count and each preset value When any ofthese bits are set to 1 the module makes the indicated comparisonbetween its accumulated count and the appropriate preset wordvalue When the comparison is true the corresponding output of themodule may be energized Of course the enable outputs bit in thecontrol word must also be set to 1 for outputs to be energized

As Figure 62 shows one bit is used for each comparison parameterless than equal to or greater than Note that more than one of thesebits can be set to 1 for each preset allowing such combinations asless than or equal to greater than or equal to or not equal to

Bit 14 of each preset word is not used It may be 1 or 0

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 49: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

6ndash5Block Transfer Programming

1313

Note that there is no identifying bit pattern to distinguish presetwords 1 and 2 from each other The encodercounter moduleidentifies these words by their order of transmission in blocktransfer As these words are stored in memory preset word 1 isstored in the word immediately following the output control wordPreset word 2 is then stored in the word immediately followingpreset word 1

The module communicates with any Allen-Bradley processor thathas block transfer capability The module is a bidirectional blocktransfer module Bidirectional means that the module performs bothread and write block transfer operations You transfer data fromyour module to the processorrsquos data table with a block transfer read(BTR) instruction You transfer data to your module from theprocessorrsquos data table with a block transfer write (BTW) instruction

) 5amp

The following examples use block transfer instructions to performblock transfers However the Mini-PLC-2 (cat no 1772-LN3) andPLC-220 (cat no 1772-LP1-LP2) processors use multiple GETinstructions to perform block transfers Refer to the processor userrsquosmanual for an explanation of multiple GET block transferThe generalized and example programs (Figure 63 and Figure 64)demonstrate the use of a single block transfer read (BTR) and asingle block transfer write (BTW) to pass data between the processorand the module

5607

3F ) 2

0

7gt 5

06

7gt555 5

77

7gt555

57gt777

06

5

gtgtFgtgtgtgtFgtgt 15962

813 2

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 50: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

6ndash6 Block Transfer Programming

1313

gt 413

Rungs 1 and 2 - These rungs request the block transfer write (BTW)and block transfer read (BTR) operations

Rung 3 - When the processor successfully completes a BTRoperation it sets the done (DN) bit and enables the file-to-file move(FFM) instruction The FFM instruction moves the BTR data file(CCC-DDD) into a storage data file (EEE-FFF) This prevents theprocessor from using invalid data if a block transfer communicationsfault should occur

5607+

813 ) 2

5

13

513

13

5

gt

gt

13

3

lt98gtI76gt60

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt1313

7ltgt09gt7ltgt9B

906gt556E

909E

7ltgtlt0+E

7ltgtE

gtgt

7ltgt6E

60gt6gt

gtgt

lt98gtI76gt65

50gt556E

95ltgt556E

lt98gtlt0+E

7ltE

gtgt

For PLC-2 family processors we recommend that you set the blocklength to zero Then the module determines the number of transferwords The 1771-IJIK defaults to 3 words in a BTW and 1 word ina BTR if you program a block length of zero

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 51: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

6ndash7Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

Use the following ladder logic with PLC-3 or PLC-310 processorsThis program assumes that your application requires a single BTRand BTW instruction to pass data between the processor and themodule

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 65 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 66 forexample ladder logic with entered values

5607

3F 2

0

6

5

lt(

I96

gtFgt06gt

gtFgt06gt

6gtFgt06gt

I96

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt0gt

6gtFgt0gt

lt

lt

lt

J

gtFgt0gt

gtFgt06gt

06

5

5

6

06

6

5

lt(

lt

5

6

0

5

15045

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 52: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

6ndash8 Block Transfer Programming

1313

56070

13 2

lt

0

5

6

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

I96

gtgtI96gtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

J

gtEgtgtE

gtEgtgtE

E

gtgtFgtgt

0lt

0lt

0lt

lt

5

6

0lt

0lt

0lt

E

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

6gt6gt6

15064

lt98gtI76gt60

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

06

lt98gtI76gt65

68gtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgt

69gtgtgtgtgtEgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

95ltgtgtgtEgtgtgt

50Egtgt

lt0+gtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

0ltE

gtFgt++

7E

7E

Rung DescriptionsRung 1 - Rung one is true only at power up It uses status word 3bit 03 (the PLC-3rsquos AC power loss bit) to zero the control file of boththe BTR and BTW instructions

Rung 2 - The equal instruction is used at power up At power up theBTR and BTW control files both equal zero so the BTW instructionis enabled

Rung 2 and 3 - During normal program execution the BTW andBTR instructions are alternately executed The done bit of eitherinstruction enables the next block transfer instruction After powerup the BTR and BTW done bits are used to alternate reads andwrites

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 53: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

6ndash9Block Transfer Programming

1313

5amp

You can use the following ladder logic with PLC-5 processors Thisprogram assumes that your application requires a single BTR andBTW to pass data between the processor and the module

Ladder logic alternates the execution of BTR and BTW instructionsThe processor checks data validity before accepting read data andsets one enable bit at a time

Refer to Figure 67 for generalized ladder logic and to Figure 68 forexample ladder logic with entered values

56071

3F 2

0

06

15047

0

gt1

5gt7 $$$

222

gtgt

06

gt1

5gt7

CCC

gtgt

0

06

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 54: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

6ndash10 Block Transfer Programming

1313

5607E

813 2

0

lt98gt0676gt60

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

E

E

06

lt98gt0676gt65gt

61

)

gt1

E

5

5gt7

lt(

E

6

7gtAgt6(gt

7gtAgt6(gt

15965

E

E

Rung DescriptionsRungs 0 and 1 - Rungs 0 and 1 execute BTW and BTR instructionsalternately When the processor completes the BTW instruction itenables the BTR instruction immediately in the same scan Enablinga block transfer instruction places the block transfer request inqueue There is one queue for each IO chassis Waiting timedepends on the number of queued requests ahead of it

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 55: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1313

The input Status word stores a maximum count of 999 (BCD) Ifusing binary resolution the maximum count is 1111 1111 1111 (4095binary) To count beyond these full scale values you may want touse either of the following ladder programs for PLCndash2 or PLCndash3family processors

Both programs (Figure 71 and Figure 72) extend the count beyond999 (4095 binary) in the same manner Either program compares thenew count value with the value in the previous scan (old value) Ifthe difference of the new value less the old value is greater than aconstant (a constant less than 9992 or 40952) the count passedthrough zero If the sign of the difference is negative the up counteris incremented by one if positive the down counter is decrementedby one

8

2amp GGG

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 56: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

7ndash2 Special Programming

1313

5617(

8 2amp GGG 9) =

1313

1313

0 0

90-8

660

90

6B9

577490

-9lt5

13

1313

gt

13

H

900 577490

-9lt5

K690+69+5

060 6B9 90 769 660 904 096 13134

7 0+ 5776 606 0+ 900 =90 5 0+69+K69A 0+ 60 0+ 904 0+ 900 0 lt 0+ - 0+

090lt 90 97 0+ -8 =+lt7 97 333 96 34

13

1313

gt333

K69 0BBlt5774

50790

706 0+69+ E 7 0+ 97 0+ 5776 0B0+ 60 0+ 90A 7 90B 0+ 560 0+ 904

0+69+5

gt

13

1313

gt333

K69 90BBlt5774

50790

0+69+5

gt

1313

50 90-8

660

90

6B9790

5ltL 0+ 090lt 90 5 9B 0+ 660 90 09 0+ 6B9 90

0

0 0

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 57: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

7ndash3Special Programming

1313

5617)

8 2amp GGG 9 =

6 6 69

6 6 6

Mgtgt-gtgtN

E

13

=gtgtgtgt

13

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

=gtgt5gtgt

E

13

6 6 6

6 6 6

B

9Bgt0+gt8

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9B

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtgtE

lt

gtgtgtHgtgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtgtgtgtgtFgtgt6

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

60

gtgtgtGgtgtgt

gtgtEgtgtE

gtgtEgtgtE

0

906gtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

05

906gt59gt

gtgtgtFgtgtgt

gtgtgtFgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgtgt

9B

gtgtEgtgtE

6gtgtEgtgtE

9Bgt769gtgtgtgt09gtgtgt6

MgtgtgtgtgtN

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 58: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

7ndash4 Special Programming

1313

gt 413 95617)=

Rung 0 ndash This rung strips the upper byte of the count value andstores the value

A = BTR statusB = MaskR = Temporary count storage with upper byte removed

A = Temporary count storage with upper byte removedR = New count value

Rung 1 ndash This rung subtracts the old count value from the new valueand stores the difference with its sign

A = New count valueB = Old count valueR = Difference of new count value less old value

Rung 2 ndash This rung looks at the sign and magnitude of the differencefrom rung 1 and compares it with a constant (a constant less than9992 or 40952) If positive the up counter is incremented by oneif negative the down counter is decremented by one

Rung 3 ndash This rung moves the new count value (A) to the old countstorage location (R)

A = New count valueR ndash Old value storage location

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 59: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

133

13 (11( lt 8

3 13 13

)=

( =5 =

) 6 8+C 2

5 0 =

( 1

(11(

2 ))$ B A 4B

) 6( B F B B = F 4B B =2 F 4B 5 ( ) 1 4

9) 6( ) ) )) F 2 ) )B F B 2

5) 1313 413 2

0 5) 1313 43 0-

(11(lt

2 ))$ =B2 B ) O 13 29) O 4 2

) 6( H B H B27 B2 F B E B F 134B 2P B F 4B 25 ( ) 1 = 7 B2 F B E B F 4B 2P B F 34B 25 ( ) 1 =

9) 6( ) ) )) 4 F 2 ) )B F B2

5) 13138 4 2

0 5) 13138 4 0-

3 13

lt 4 4 1313 -9

-9 0 B

lt ) B

1) ))$ B 6O

4 $)4 2

) 2 ) ))$

Q B 13 Q B

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 60: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

SpecificationsAndash2

133

13 (11( lt 8

1 lt 9) 6 7

8$( 1313

13138

lt E P 6( E P lt E P 6( E P ( () = 4 5 ()4A

9)0)

=0 A 9)( =0 A 9)( 5$ + =0 A 9)( 0 1 deg7 = deg

( 0) =0 A )1(A )( =0 A )1(A )( 5$ + =0 A )1(A )( 0 1 deg7 = deg

6 +$ =0 5A )1(A )( 5) + 3R (

19)()(

13 =0 A )1( 1((

B =0 7A 9)(( Q +C

5 $ 1B (

6 67 $ B- 1+C R +C +CB- +C R R 3+C

70- $ 1B Q 1+C ( )

( 0 $ 1B = )

67 $ B 1+C R 1+C +C

6 ) A = )))

0$) =) $

)

($lt( =2

13 = ) )) 8+CP 3= O ) 8+C 13 = ) )) 8+C

7 ( 4 4 1313

7 ( 0O

133 ) =4413

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 61: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

Specifications Andash3

133

13 (11( lt 8

7 ( (C

($

=44 )) (- =4 2

= ) 1

lt lt lt O)

O)

) 3-- 5A) E A A $ A $ A 4--lt4A 6O

01 6 A) -K A

($ )( ( 4 6 ) 13134A S ( ( 4T

1 wwwabcom 5 $A A 4

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 62: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

SpecificationsAndash4

133

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 63: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1313

1313A )A

13138A )A

2

)) 1 A ( A

1 ) A ) A

1 )((A 2)A lt 2)A lt 2)A 13lt 2)A 3

A

A )A

A

A

A

4

A

)1313A 13138A A A ) A ) A ( A

8

-A ( )A

- A

2)1 )(A (

) A 13ltA

2 ) OA

A A

) ( A

) A

lt

1$( )A

1$( -9 A

A A

)A

)2(A $ OA

))((A )(( ) A

) A 1 A )A

) A 1 A

)A A

) OA 2A

) A 1 A ( A

)( )A A

)((1 A 2( A 13( A

)(( )A

Index

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 64: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

IndexIndash2

1313

A ltA 3

A -A

( A 13

( )A ) A ) A

A

A ) (A (A 13

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 65: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

$ 6)

$ ) A ) ) 4

4

4 4 4 4 4 5 4

9= amp13 4 9= amp

)-)

2)

2)

(

=$

2 0 $

)

(U

$

O

( U

U

9

1 4

L lt-

6 E 1( A $ 4A $ 5A $ +4A 9+ E=13

7IE = 4$ 33 313

8

(11( (11(lt (11(028 G101E(E ))

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 66: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

9

lt 79lt5 +6

lt

gt6

9B

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY

IF MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAILFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION1 ALLEN BRADLEY DRMAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

Indash2

1313

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 67: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1313

1313

At Allen-Bradley customer service means experienced representatives at CustomerSupport Centers in key cities throughout the world for sales service and support Ourvalue-added services include

1313

bull SupportPlus programsbull telephone support and 24-hour emergency hotlinebull software and documentation updatesbull technical subscription services

8 5

bull application engineering assistancebull integration and start-up assistancebull field servicebull maintenance support

bull lecture and lab coursesbull self-paced computer and video-based trainingbull job aids and workstationsbull training needs analysis

gt13 8

bull your only ldquoauthorizedrdquo sourcebull current revisions and enhancementsbull worldwide exchange inventorybull local support

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 68: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

1313 ) ) 131344 $ 3 1313446 33

31313)$( 61 A 4

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 69: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

Introduction_Catagory Types

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
This tab summarizes Rockwell Automation Global Sales and Marketing preferred printing standards It also provides guidance on whether a publication should be released as JIT (print on demand) or if it requires an RFQ for offset printingFind your publication type in the first section below Use the assigned Printing Category information to determine the standard print specifications for that document type The Printing Categories are defined below the Publication Type section Note there may be slightly different print specifications for the categories depending on the region (EMEA or Americas)For more information on Global Sales and Marketing Printing Standards see publication RA-CO004 in DocMan
Publication Type and Print Category
Publication Type Off Set Print Category Spec (See table below) JIT Spec (See table below) Description Order Min Order Max Life Cycle Usage Release Option
AD NA - Puttman NA Advertisement Reprint Colour NA NA Presale Internal
AP A3 D2 Application Solution or Customer Success Story 5 100 Presale External
AR NA NA ArticleEditorialByline NA NA Presale Internal
News Release (press releases should not be checked into DocMan or printed)
AT B3 B4 D5 Application Techniques 5 100 Presale External
BR A2 Primary A1 NA Brochures 5 100 Presale External
CA C2 Primary C1 NA Catalogue 1 50 Presale External
CG NA NA Catalogue Guide 1 50 Presale External
CL NA NA Collection 5 50 Presale External
CO A5 A6 A9 D5 Company Confidential Information NA NA NA Confidential
CP E-only E-only D5 Competitive Information 5 50 NA Confidential
DC E-only E-only Discount Schedules NA NA Presale Internal
DI A1 A3 NA Direct Mail 5 100 Presale Internal
DM NA NA Product Demo 5 50 Presale Internal
DS B3 D5 Dimensions Sheet 1 5 Post External
DU B3 D5 Document Update 1 5 Post External
GR B2 D6 Getting Results 1 5 Post External
IN B3 D5 Installation instructions 1 5 Post External
LM NA NA Launch KitMaterials 5 50 Presale Internal
PC B3 D5 Packaging Contents
PL E-only Primary B3 E-only Price List 5 50 Presale Internal
PM B2 D6 Programming Manual 1 5 Post External
PP A3 D1 Product Profile NOTE Application Solutions are to be assigned the AP pub type 5 100 Presale External
QR B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Reference 1 5 Post External
QS B2 Primary B3 B5 D5 D6 Quick Start 1 5 Post External
RM B2 D5 D6 Reference Manual 1 5 Post External
RN B3 D5 Release Notes 1 5 Post External
SG B1 Primary B4 D5 D6 Selection Guide Colour 5 100 Presale External
SG B2 D5 D6 Selection Guide BW 5 100 Presale External
SP A1 A2 A3 A4 NA Service ProfileSales Promotion NOTE Service profiles are to be assigned the PP pub type 5 100 Presale Internal
SR B2 B3 D5 D6 Specification Rating Sheet 5 100 Presale External
TD B2 Primary B3 B4 B5 D5 D6 Technical Data 5 100 Presale External
TG B2 B3 D6 Troubleshooting Guide 1 5 Post External
UM B2 Primary B4 D6 User Manual BW 1 5 Post External
WD B3 D5 Wiring Diagrams Dwgs 1 5 Post Internal
WP B3 Primary B5 D5 White Paper 5 100 Presale External
Pre-sale Marketing All paper in this category is White Brightness 85 or better Opacity 87 or better
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
A1 4 color 170gsm 2pp 100 gloss cover 100 gloss text
A2 4 color 170gsm folded 4pp 100 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm gt 4pp 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
A4 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A5 2 color 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk
A6 1 color 170gsm Silk ndash 120gsm Silk 80 gloss cover 80 matt sheet text
A7 4 color cover 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text
Selection Guide
A8 4 color cover Category being deleted 50 matte sheet text self cover
2 color text
Selection Guide
A9 2 color 100gsm bond 50 matte sheet text self cover
Selection Guide
Post Sale Technical Communication
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
B1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 100gsm bond 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 50 matte sheet text
B2 1 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B3 1 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
B4 2 color 60 Cover
160gsm Colortech amp 100gsm Bond 50 matte sheet text
B5 2 color 50 matte sheet text self cover
100gsm bond
Catalogs
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
C1 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 90gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
4 color text 45 Coated Sheet
C2 4 color cover 270gsm Gloss 80gsm silk 10 Point Cover C2S
2 color text 32-33 Coated Sheet
JIT POD
Category Color Options AP EMEA Paper Requirements Canada LA US Paper Requirements
D1 4 color 170gsm white silk 80 gloss cover coated 2 sides
D2 4 color 120gsm white silk 80 gloss text coated 2 sides self cover
D3 4 color Cover 170gsm with Body 120gsm 80 gloss cover 80 gloss text coated 2 sides
D4 1 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D5 1 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D6 1 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D7 2 color 160gsm tab 90 index
D8 2 color 80gsm bond 20 bond self cover
D9 2 color Cover 160gsm tab with Body 80gsm bond 90 index 20 bond
D10 Combination 4 color cover with 2 color body Cover 160gsm with Body 80gsm 90 index 20 bond
Page 70: Encoder/Counter Modules - Rockwell Automationliterature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/... · 444444444444444444444444444444 * ... Encoder/Counter Modules

Print Spec Sheet

JIT Printing Specifications RA-QR005D-EN-P - 4032009
Printing Specification YOUR DATA HERE Instructions NO
(required) Category D5 Select Print Category ABC or D from category list on Introduction_Catagory Types tab 11rdquo x 17rdquo LOOSE -Loose Leaf YES Pre-sale Marketing TOP
(required) Finished Trim Size Width 85rdquo x 11rdquo 85rdquo x 11rdquo PERFECT - Perfect Bound A1 LEFT
(required) Publication Number 1771-UM006B-EN-P Sample 2030-SP001B-EN-P 3rdquo x 5rdquo SADDLE - Saddle Stitch A2 RIGHT CORNER
Use Legacy Number NO YES or NO 18rdquo x 24rdquo Poster PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound) A4 BOTTOM SIDE
Legacy Number if applicable Sample Legacy Number 0160-533 24rdquo x 36rdquo Poster STAPLED1 -1 position A3
Publication Title EncoderScanner Modules Sample ElectroGuard Selling Brief 36rdquo x 24rdquo Poster STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position A5
(required) Business Group Marketing Commercial As entered in DocMan 4rdquo x 6rdquo STAPLED2 - 2 positions A6
(required) Cost Center 19021 As entered in DocMan - enter number only no description Example - 19021 CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021CMKMKE Market Access Program - 19105 475rdquo x 7rdquo (slightly smaller half-size) THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound) A7
BindingStitching SADDLE - Saddle Stitch Review key on right Saddle-Stitch Items All page quantities must be divisible by 420 sheets max on 20 (text and cover) 20 sheets = 80-page pub16 sheets max on 20 (text) and 90 (cover) 16 sheets = 64-page pubPerfect Bound Items475 sheets max on 20 no cover 475 sheets = 950-page pub470 sheets max wcover 90 index unless indicated otherwise) 470 sheets = 940-page pubCoil Bound Items400 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 400 sheets = 800-page pubTape Bound Items125 sheets max on 20 no cover 125 sheets = 250-page pub120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 120 sheets = 240-page pubDouble Wire Bound Items250 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise) 250 sheets = 500-page pub 475rdquo x 775rdquo THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline) A8
(required) Page Count of Publication 68 Total page count including cover 55rdquo x 85rdquo (half-size) Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline) A9
Paper Stock Color White White is assumed For color options contact your vendor 6rdquo x 4rdquo Post Sale Technical Communication
Number of Tabs Needed 5 tab in stock at RR Donnelley 7385rdquo x 9rdquo (RSI Std) B1
Stitching Location Blank Corner or Side 825rdquo x 10875rdquo B2
Drill Hole YESNO NO All drilled publications use the 5-hole standard 516 inch-size hole and a minimum of frac14 inch from the inner page border 825rdquo x 11rdquo (RA product profile std) B3
Glue Location on Pad Glue location on pads 8375rdquo x 10875 B4
Number of Pages per Pad Average sheets of paper 25 50 75100 Max 9rdquo x 12rdquo (Folder) B5
Ink Color One color assumes BLACK 4 color assume CMYK Indicate PMS number herehellip A4 (8 frac14rdquo x 11 frac34rdquo) (210 x 297 mm) Catalogs
Used in Manufacturing YES A5 (583rdquo x 826rdquo) (148 x 210 mm) C1
Comments C2
Part Number 957678-18 JIT POD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9

Very High-Speed Counter Modules - Rockwell …literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/...5V and 24V Very High-speed Counter Modules ... • Counter ASIC ...

Very High-Speed Counter Modules - Rockwell …literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/...5V and 24V Very High-speed Counter Modules ... • Counter ASIC ...

ENCODER - · PDF file445 Rotary Encoder SENSOR ENCODER COUNTER INFORMATION H M I P L C KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. The specifications and prices described in

ENCODER - · PDF file445 Rotary Encoder SENSOR ENCODER COUNTER INFORMATION H M I P L C KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. The specifications and prices described in

Multifunction counter board, optically isolated, encoder ...addi-data.com/datasheets/apci1710_DS.pdf · Multifunction counter board, optically isolated, ... incremental counter, SSI

Multifunction counter board, optically isolated, encoder ...addi-data.com/datasheets/apci1710_DS.pdf · Multifunction counter board, optically isolated, ... incremental counter, SSI

Quadrature Decoder/Counter Interface ICsQuadrature Decoder/Counter Interface ICs Technical Data HCTL-2000 HCTL-2016 HCTL-2020 Features • Interfaces Encoder to Microprocessor •

Quadrature Decoder/Counter Interface ICsQuadrature Decoder/Counter Interface ICs Technical Data HCTL-2000 HCTL-2016 HCTL-2020 Features • Interfaces Encoder to Microprocessor •

Pulsed Laser Diodes - Avalanche Photodiodes · Pulsed laser diodes, avalanche photodiodes, CUBEs, ... Such products include PLD drivers, APD modules and photon counter modules. Photon

Pulsed Laser Diodes - Avalanche Photodiodes · Pulsed laser diodes, avalanche photodiodes, CUBEs, ... Such products include PLD drivers, APD modules and photon counter modules. Photon

1734-UM004A-EN-P, POINT I/O Thermocouple and RTD Modules ... · POINT I/O Thermocouple and RTD Modules ... sample programs and layout examples shown ... 5V Encoder/Counter Module

1734-UM004A-EN-P, POINT I/O Thermocouple and RTD Modules ... · POINT I/O Thermocouple and RTD Modules ... sample programs and layout examples shown ... 5V Encoder/Counter Module

1738-IN012B-EN-E ArmorPOINT I/O 5V DC Encoder/Counter ...

1738-IN012B-EN-E ArmorPOINT I/O 5V DC Encoder/Counter ...

Mode 20 – High Speed UP/DOWN Counter - … any quadrature encoder, four unique logic states are created internal to the encoder. This is based on the rising edge to rising edge (one

Mode 20 – High Speed UP/DOWN Counter - … any quadrature encoder, four unique logic states are created internal to the encoder. This is based on the rising edge to rising edge (one

Fieldbus Independent I/O Modules Incremental Encoder ... · PDF fileI/O Modules Incremental Encoder Interfaces 750-637 ... Make important notes that are to be complied with so ...

Fieldbus Independent I/O Modules Incremental Encoder ... · PDF fileI/O Modules Incremental Encoder Interfaces 750-637 ... Make important notes that are to be complied with so ...

บทที11 Digital Encoder · Add High Speed Counter Module 1) คลิกขวาที I/O Configuration ->New Module -> Add การ์ด High Speed Counter 1756-HSC 2)

บทที11 Digital Encoder · Add High Speed Counter Module 1) คลิกขวาที I/O Configuration ->New Module -> Add การ์ด High Speed Counter 1756-HSC 2)

MDX ENCODER MDX RESOLVER - Leroy- · PDF file2 GENERAL MDX Encoder - MDX Resolver - Installation guide 5340 en - 2017.07 / b 1 - GENERAL The MDX modules are add-on options dedicated

MDX ENCODER MDX RESOLVER - Leroy- · PDF file2 GENERAL MDX Encoder - MDX Resolver - Installation guide 5340 en - 2017.07 / b 1 - GENERAL The MDX modules are add-on options dedicated

Rotary Encoder / LCD Control for LMX2541 and LMX2470 ... Encoder / LCD Control for LMX2541 and LMX2470 Synthesizer Modules ... The PIC code in .ASM and .HEX formats for both LMX2470

Rotary Encoder / LCD Control for LMX2541 and LMX2470 ... Encoder / LCD Control for LMX2541 and LMX2470 Synthesizer Modules ... The PIC code in .ASM and .HEX formats for both LMX2470

Counter I-O Modules

Counter I-O Modules

LSI3101/3101A Encoder / Linear Scale Counter Card fileLSI3101/3101A . Encoder / Linear Scale . Counter Card . Software Manual (V1.2) 健昇科技股份有限公司. JS AUTOMATION CORP.

LSI3101/3101A Encoder / Linear Scale Counter Card fileLSI3101/3101A . Encoder / Linear Scale . Counter Card . Software Manual (V1.2) 健昇科技股份有限公司. JS AUTOMATION CORP.

1734-um006-a-en-p.pdf, Encoder/Counter Modules, User … · the examples shown in this publication. ... Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding ... 24V Encoder/Counter Module Installation

1734-um006-a-en-p.pdf, Encoder/Counter Modules, User … · the examples shown in this publication. ... Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding ... 24V Encoder/Counter Module Installation

Multifunction counter board, optically isolated, encoder, …s459723507.online.de/datasheet/Datasheet_English/06_PCI... · 2013-06-13 · Multifunction counter board, optically isolated,

Multifunction counter board, optically isolated, encoder, …s459723507.online.de/datasheet/Datasheet_English/06_PCI... · 2013-06-13 · Multifunction counter board, optically isolated,

Advanced 4-CH Encoder Card with High-speed Triggering ... · Advanced 4-CH Encoder Card with High-speed Triggering Function ... +81-3-5333-6040 ... Encoder counter clear via EZ input

Advanced 4-CH Encoder Card with High-speed Triggering ... · Advanced 4-CH Encoder Card with High-speed Triggering Function ... +81-3-5333-6040 ... Encoder counter clear via EZ input

CBC-4032 Remote People Counter Modules Installation Guide ...

CBC-4032 Remote People Counter Modules Installation Guide ...

New Flagship R CPU Units: The Ultimate in Speed - OMRON … · Inverter (e.g., 3G3RX) Motor CJ1M High-speed counter input High-speed counter input I/O Incremental encoder ... lighting

New Flagship R CPU Units: The Ultimate in Speed - OMRON … · Inverter (e.g., 3G3RX) Motor CJ1M High-speed counter input High-speed counter input I/O Incremental encoder ... lighting

HMI ENCODER COUNTER INFORMATION H M I P L C HMI KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. HMI Software Koyo

HMI ENCODER COUNTER INFORMATION H M I P L C HMI KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. HMI Software Koyo